Canon | EOS C300 | User manual | Canon EOS C300 User manual

Canon EOS C300 User manual
‫‪PUB. DIE-0406-000‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻸﻣﻄﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﱢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺫﺍﺫ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﱢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻣﺨﺎﻟﻔﺎ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻛﺎ ﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻲ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ )‪(FCC‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )‪ ،(HD‬ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ‪EOS C300/‬‬
‫‪.EOS C300 PL‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ )‪ .(FCC‬ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻃﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ‪ (١) :‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻭ)‪ (٢‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ )‪ .(FCC‬ﺗﻤﺖ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺯﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﻟّﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺿﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ؛ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(FCC‬‬
‫ﻳُﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Canon U.S.A., Inc.‬‬
‫‪،One Canon Plaza, Lake Success‬‬
‫‪.NY 11042, U.S.A‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ‪(٥١٦)٣٢٨-٥٦٠٠ :‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻛﺄﻥ ﺗﺘﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﱢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺯ ‪ EOS C300 / EOS C300 PL / CA-940 / CG-940‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪CAUTION‬‬
‫‪RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK‬‬
‫‪DO NOT OPEN‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ(‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ "ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ" ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ؛ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳُﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ )ﺧﺪﻣﺔ( ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ )ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ( ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ )‪) (WEEE‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ (2002/96/EC‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ (2006/66/EC‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻣﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (EEE‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻛﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻪ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺴﻬﻢ ﺗﻌﺎﻭﻧﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ‪.www.canon-europe.com/environment‬‬
‫)ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻭﺃﻳﺴﻠﻨﺪﺍ ﻭﻟﺸﺘﻨﺸﺘﺎﻳﻦ(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ "ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EOS C300 / EOS C300 PL‬ﻣﻦ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﻢ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺴﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺗﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺒﻄﻞ ﻏﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻄﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻄﺐ ﻧﺼﻼﻥ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﻧﺼﻼﻥ ﻭﻃﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﺑﺎﺭﺯ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯ ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻲ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺛﻘﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٣‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻷﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺴﻜﺎﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ICES-003‬ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺪﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﻱ ‪ SD‬ﻭ‪ SDHC‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ‪ CompactFlash‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SanDisk Corporation‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ‪ Logo‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.CompactFlash Association‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ‪ Apple‬ﻭ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻭ‪ Final Cut Pro‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Apple Inc.‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ‪ Avid‬ﻭ‪ Media Composer‬ﻭ‪ NewsCutter‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Avid Technology, Inc.‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ HDMI Licensing LLC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﺫﻛﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ exFAT‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪.Microsoft‬‬
‫• ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ MPEG-2‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،MPEG-2‬ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ‪ ،MPEG LA, L.L.C.‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪.COLORADO 80206 ،DENVER ،SUITE 300 ،250 STEELE STREET‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﺮﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪EOS C300/C300 PL‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EOS C300/C300 PL‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﺘﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺨﺼﺼﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻚ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ CMOS‬ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪DIGIC DV III‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ CMOS‬ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٨٫٢٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪ ٣٨٤٠ × ٢١٦٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ ،DIGIC DV III‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ*‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻫﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ "ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ"‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺘﻜﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ EOS C300‬ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ،Canon‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ Cine‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪EOS C300‬‬
‫‪ PL‬ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ PL‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻫﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ‪.MPEG-2 Long GOP‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪Material eXchange‬‬
‫)‪ Format (MXF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻲ )‪(NLE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻬﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ PAL‬ﺃﻭ ‪24.00P‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ( ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺕ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٧‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻪ ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﻳﺢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪.(٣٢ A‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ّ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٢٧٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻳﺢ ﺳﻴﻀﻤﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫‪ ١٠٫١‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ( ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪٪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗُ ﱢ‬
‫)‪ .CompactFlash (CF‬ﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻠﻖ ً‬
‫ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .CF‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ‪ ،CF‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪ .(٤٤ A‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ )‪ (٤٤ A‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ‪.CF‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Canon XF Utility‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺗﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ Canon XF Utility‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ NLE‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ*‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪ (١٣٢ A‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ )‪ (٩٣ A‬ﻣﺰﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ )ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪ ،(١٠١ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻ ﻣﺜﻴﻞ ﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ "ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ" ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ C300 / C300 PL‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon Log‬ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺭﺍﺋﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،(١٠٩ A) Canon Log‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺬﻫﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻖ ﻟﻠﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HD/SD SDI‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (١٢٩ A‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﻤّﻦ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ )‪ (LTC‬ﺑﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ SMPTE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪Genlock‬‬
‫)‪ (٧٧ A‬ﻭﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ (٧٩ ،٧٨ A) TIME CODE‬ﻭﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ SYNC OUT‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺰءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ )‪ (٩٩ A‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫)‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪ .(٣٠ A ،‬ﻭﺗﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫)‪ (١١٠ A‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪ (١١٠ A‬ﻣﺰﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪C300 / C300‬‬
‫‪ PL‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WFT-E6‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ .(٤٧ A) Wi-Fi Remote‬ﻭﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪/ISO‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ PCM‬ﺧﻄﻲ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫)‪ ١٦‬ﺑﺖ‪ ٤٨/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪) XLR‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻫﻤﻲ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )‪،(٨٨ A‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ )‪ ،(٨٩ A‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ )‪.(٨٩ A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫)‪ ،(٨٥ A‬ﻭﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )‪.(١٧٣ A‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪١١‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ‪١٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(( ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ ‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪٣٦ LCD‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٣٧ LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻒ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﻧﺰﻉ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٤١‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٤١ CF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٤١ CF‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٤٢ CF‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٤٣ CF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٤٤ CF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٤٥ CF‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪٤٧ Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪٤٧ Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٥٠ Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) CINEMA‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ( ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪٥٧ FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٥٩ Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٦١ ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ‪٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٦٢ Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪٦٣ ND‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪٦٣ ND‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٦٣ Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٦٤ Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٦٧ Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٦٩ Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪٧١‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٧١‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪٧٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ )ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء( ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪٨١ XLR‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪٨٢ XLR‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) MIC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ( ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٨٥ Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪٨٦ Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٩٠ Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ %‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٩١ Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪٩٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ‪٩٦‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ‪١٠٩ Canon‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١١١‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪١١١ SD‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪١١١ SD‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪١١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪١١٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪١١٧‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪١١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪١١٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪ $‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪١٢٠ %‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪ $‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪١٢٠ %‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪١٢٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻲ )‪١٢٢ (GPS‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪١٢٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ‪١٢٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪١٢٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪١٢٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪١٢٥‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪١٢٩ HD/SD SDI‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪١٢٩ HDMI OUT‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪١٢٩ SYNC OUT‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪١٣٠ SD‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻦ ‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫)ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١٣٣ (Windows‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫)ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١٣٥ (Mac OS‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪١٣٨‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) CAMERA‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ‪١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) MEDIA‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ( ‪١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪١٤١‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ( ‪١٤١‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪١٤١‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪١٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪١٤٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪١٤٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪١٤٣‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٤٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪١٤٥‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ‪١٤٧‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٤٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪١٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ ‪١٦٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪١٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪/‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪١٧١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٧٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪١٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪١٨١‬‬
١٠
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ .Canon EOS C300/C300 PL‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ )‪.(١٦٢ A‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻤﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :A‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :#‬ﻧﺺ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ "ﺷﺎﺷﺔ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ "ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ "CF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪.CompactFlash (CF‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ "ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ "SD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ‪.SDHC‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ "ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ CF‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪.SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EOS C300‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪.1.4 USM‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ )‪.(٢٦ A‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[¤ TC/UB Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،(TC/UB‬ﺛﻢ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [Time Code‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻛﺎﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫)‪ .(٢٩ A‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻣﻮﺟﺰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪.(١٤٧ A‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺔ ] [ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CG-940‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻀﻤ ًﻨﺎ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ(‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪BP-955‬‬
‫)ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪CA-940‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻀﻤ ًﻨﺎ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪DC-940‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻀﻤ ًﻨﺎ ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ(‬
‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻒ ‪SS-1200‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٠٫٦٤‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫)‪ ١/٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‪١‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪(٢ x) ١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫‪XF Utilities‬‬
‫‪٣Canon‬‬
‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WFT-E6‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ‪ Canon XF Utilities‬ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺛﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪ .(١٣٢ A‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) "Canon XF Utility‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ (PDF‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤ ١٥ ١٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) MAGN.‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ( )‪/(٧٠ A‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ١‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ )‪(٩٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) PEAKING‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ( )‪/(٧٠ A‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ )‪(٩٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭﺍ ‪) ND FILTER‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪(٦٣ A) +/- (ND‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) ZEBRA‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ( )‪/(٧٢ A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ٣‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ )‪(٩٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) WFM‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ( )‪/(٨٨ A‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ )‪(٩٩ A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪(٢٦ A) Q‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪(٤٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) DISP.‬ﻋﺮﺽ( )‪BATT. INFO/(١١٥ ،٥٢ A‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( )‪(٢٤ A‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‪/‬ﺯﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( )‪(٢٩ A‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪(٦٤ ،٦٢ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) STATUS‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ( )‪(١٥٦ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) Å‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( )‪ /(٦٦ A‬ﺯﺭ ‪INDEX‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ( )‪/(١١٤ A‬ﺯﺭ ‪) Ñ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪(١١٤ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) u‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( )‪/(٩٢ A‬ﺯﺭ ‪) Ò‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ( )‪(١١٤ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) HEADPHONE +‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ( )‪/(١١٧ A‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ )‪(٩٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) HEADPHONE -‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ( )‪/(١١٧ A‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ )‪(٩٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) CUSTOM PICTURE‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( )‪(١٠١ A‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪(٤٧ A) WFT‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻓﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) EXT‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ( ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪(٣٤ A) ٢‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪REMOTE‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪(١٢٩ ،٧٩ A) SYNC OUT‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) HDMI OUT‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪(١٢٩ A) (HDMI‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪(٧٧ A) GENLOCK‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪(٧٩ ،٧٨ A) TIME CODE‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪(١٢٩ A) HD/SD SDI‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(٤٢ A) SD‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ × )ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ( )‪(٨٤ A‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪(٢٥ A) DC IN‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(٤٢ A) SD‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪(٨٠ A) MIC‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ )‪(٣٨ A‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ )‪(٣٨ A‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫‪$‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪(٤٩ A‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪(٣٢ A) EF‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪(٣٢ A) EF-S‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪(٣٢ A‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﺳﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪(٣٢ A) EF‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪(٣٢ A) EF‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪(٣٢ A) EF‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪ $‬ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪(٣٤ A) PL‬‬
‫‪ $‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻞ )‪(٣٤ A‬‬
‫‪ $‬ﺳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪(٣٤ A) PL‬‬
‫‪ $‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻞ )‪(٣٤ A‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪٦٢ ٦٣‬‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ‪) LOCK/RELEASE‬ﻗﻔﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(١٧١ A‬‬
‫)ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ( )‪(٥٣ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( )‪(٥٧ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪(٤٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) Joystick‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ( )‪SET/(٢٩ A‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( )‪(٢٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) CANCEL‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( )‪(٢٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( )‪(٢٩ A‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺘﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪) A‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ( ﻭ‪) B‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ(‬
‫)‪(٤١ A‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﻻﺝ ‪) RELEASE‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( )‪(٢٤ A‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(٣٧ ،٣٥ A‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )‪(٣٦ A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )‪(٥٣ A‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪A‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ( ﻭ‪) B‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ( )‪(٤١ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) RESET‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( )‪(١٦٣ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) SLOT SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ( )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(CF‬‬
‫)‪(١١٤ ،٤٣ A‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪) A‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ(‬
‫ﻭ‪) B‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ(‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪) A‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ(‬
‫ﻭ‪) B‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ( )‪(٤٢ A‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) BATT. OPEN‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( )ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫)‪(٢٤ A‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪(٢٤ A‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) CF2‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ (A‬ﻭ‪CF3‬‬
‫)ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪(٤١ A) (B‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪(٤٧ A‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ )‪(٣٩ A‬‬
‫‪ ٦٩‬ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٠٫٦٤‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ١/٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.VL-10Li II‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫‪ ٧٠‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪ TB-1‬ﻟﻠﺤﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ ٠٫٩٥‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ٣/٨‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( )‪(٣٧ A‬‬
‫‪ ٧١‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )‪(٣٧ A‬‬
‫‪ ٧٢‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪TA-100‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ )‪(٣٧ A‬‬
‫‪ ٧٣‬ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )‪(٣٧ A‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) MAGN.‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ( )‪/(٧٠ A‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ٧‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ )‪(٩٩ A‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪(٦٤ ،٦٢ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪(٤٩ A‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪(٣٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) Joystick‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ( )‪SET/(٢٩ A‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( )‪(٢٩ A‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ )‪(٣٨ A‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ )‪(٣٨ A‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) MIRROR‬ﻣﺮﺁﺓ( )‪(٣٦ A‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪(٨٠ A‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪(٨٠ A‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪(٨٠ A‬‬
‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) XLR CH1‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪) (١‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻭ‪) CH2‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(٢‬‬
‫)ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( )‪(٨٠ A‬‬
‫)‪(٢١ A‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪١٣ ١٤ ١٥ ١٦ ١٧‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١ ٢٢ ٢٣ ٢٤‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) DISP.‬ﻋﺮﺽ( )‪ ٥٢ A‬ﻭ‪(١١٥‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) Ñ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪/(١١٤ A‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ١٤‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ )‪(٩٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) WFM‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ( )‪/(٨٨ A‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ )‪(٩٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) Ú‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ( )‪/(١١٦ A‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ١٣‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫)‪(٩٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) EDGE MON.‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ( )‪/(٨٨ A‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ )‪(٩٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) INDEX‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ( )‪(١١٤ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) Ø‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( )‪/(١١٦ A‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ١٠‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ )‪(٩٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) Ò‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ( )‪/(١١٤ A‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ١١‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ )‪(٩٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ × )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ( )‪/(١١٦ A‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ١٢‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫)‪(٩٩ A‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) Ù‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ( )‪/(١١٦ A‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ١٥‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫)‪(٩٩ A‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ XLR‬ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ( ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪٢‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ( )‪(٨١ A‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪(٨٢ A) XLR‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﺎ ‪ ã‬ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ( ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪٢‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ( )‪(٨٢ A‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ‪ ã‬ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ( ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪٢‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ( )‪(٨٢ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪(٤٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( )‪(٢٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) Joystick‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ( )‪SET/(٢٩ A‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( )‪(٢٩ A‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) CANCEL‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( )‪(٢٩ A‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٠٫٦٤‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ١/٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ )‪(٣٩ A‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ )‪ (١٧٤ A‬ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪.(١٧٤ A‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ BP-955‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ BP-950G‬ﺃﻭ ‪ BP-970G‬ﺃﻭ ‪.*BP-975‬‬
‫ﺇﺫ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ BP-970G / BP-975‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ )‪.(١٦٩ A‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ CG-940‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻲ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪CHARGE‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬
‫‪ :٪٣٤-٠‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :٪٦٩-٣٥‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :٪٩٩-٧٠‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺮﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ َ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻭ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )‪ ٥٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻭ ‪ ٨٦‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪.(١٦٨ A‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) BATT. OPEN‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) BATT. OPEN‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻻﺝ‬
‫‪ّ ٣‬‬
‫‪) RELEASE‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Battery/Hour Meter‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ( )‪ .(١٦٠ A‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CHECK‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ ٍ‬
‫‪٪٢٥-٠‬‬
‫‪٪٥٠-٢٦‬‬
‫‪٪٧٥-٥١‬‬
‫‪٪١٠٠-٧٦‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) CHECK‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ(‬
‫‪100%‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) BATT. INFO‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﺳﻴﻀﻤﻦ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Battery/Hour Meter‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ( )‪ (١٦٠ A‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) BATT. INFO‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻛﻨﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺑﻮﻟﻴﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑـ ‪ 1-800-8-BATTERY‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ CA-940‬ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.DC-940‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪DC IN‬‬
‫)ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﻣﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺭﺉ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫( ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪) MEDIA‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻤﺎ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) CAMERA‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( )‬
‫( ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﺣ ﱢﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪.Q‬‬
‫)‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) CAMERA‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪) MEDIA‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ( ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) CAMERA‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) MEDIA‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫]‪) [DATE/TIME‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‪/‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ )‪ (Ð‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ((‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ )‪) [Set] (Ð‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪ ٢٤/١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪[Clock Set‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( > ]‪) [Date Format‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ )ﻟﻴﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( >‬
‫]‪) [Clock Set‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ( > ]‪) [Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫)‪ (١٧٠ A‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﻗﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫]‪) [UTC-05:00 New York‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ٠٥:٠٠-‬ﻧﻴﻮﻳﻮﺭﻙ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [UTC+01:00 Central Europe‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ٠١:٠٠+‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‪/‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ )‪.(UTC‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪SELECT‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪) [Time Zone‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ(‬
‫]‪[UTC-05:00 New York‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ٠٥:٠٠-‬ﻧﻴﻮﻳﻮﺭﻙ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪[UTC+01:00 Central Europe‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ٠١:٠٠+‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ(*‬
‫* ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‪/‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Time Zone‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ( ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫]‪[£ LCD/VF Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫]‪[Custom Display 2‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪(٢‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪SELECT‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Custom Display 2‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ ،(٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Date/Time‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﻲ ‪) English‬ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪German‬‬
‫)ﺍﻷﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Spanish‬ﺍﻹﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ‪) French‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Italian‬ﺍﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ‪Polish‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Russian‬ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺳﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Simplified Chinese‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺴﻄﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) Japanese‬ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]! ‪) [Language‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [English‬ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]! ‪) [Language‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ( ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(( ﻟﻴﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪.(١٤٧ A‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪SELECT‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CANCEL‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CANCEL‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CANCEL‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺯﺭ "‪) "SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺮﺿﺎ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CANCEL‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [L‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ Ð‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CANCEL‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ )‪.(١٥٦ A‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ((‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٤‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( ﻟﻴﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( )‪ ،(٩٩ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Add‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ( ﻣﻦ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [ My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( > ]‪) [Edit‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ( > ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ً‬
‫ﺑﺤﺜﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪My Menu‬‬
‫[ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫]‪) [Edit‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬
‫]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Move‬ﻧﻘﻞ( ﻣﻦ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [ My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( > ]‪) [Edit‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ( > ]‪) [Move‬ﻧﻘﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪My Menu‬‬
‫[ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫]‪) [Edit‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬
‫]‪) [Move‬ﻧﻘﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ﻣﻦ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [ My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( > ]‪) [Edit‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ( > ]‪) [Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫]‪My Menu‬‬
‫[ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫]‪) [Edit‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬
‫]‪) [Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [ My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( > ]‪) [Edit‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ( > ]‪) [Reset All‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‬
‫]‪My Menu‬‬
‫[ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫]‪) [Edit‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Reset All‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﺨﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﻭﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ )ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪) AIR INTAKE‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء((‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ً‬
‫َ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻳﺼﺎ ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻮﺭ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺧﻠﻮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ #‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺃﻱ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ :EF‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ :EF-S‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF-S‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.AF‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﻓﻚ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( > ]‪[Periph. Illum. Corr.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [Periph. Illum. Corr.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫]‪[Periph. Illum. Corr.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( > ]‪) [Periph. Illum. Corr.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ‬‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺟﺰءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺳﻴﻘﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬‫ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ ،EF-S‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ً‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ $‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪PL‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻞ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻭﻓﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ PL‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.(٣٦ A) LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ EXT 1‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.EXT 2‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ EXT 1‬ﻭ‪ EXT 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ّ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﻓﻜﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﻭﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٢٧٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻭ‪ ٢٧٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻷﻱ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻒ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MIRROR‬ﻣﺮﺁﺓ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MIRROR‬ﻣﺮﺁﺓ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ‪ ³‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻭﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ‪ ³‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ‪ ³‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ LCD‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ )‪.(٣٧ A‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪[Custom Function‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( > ]‪) [Scan Reverse Rec‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ( ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( > ]‪) [LCD/VF Simul.‬ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫]‪) [LCD/VF Simul.‬ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﻛﺄﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MIRROR‬ﻣﺮﺁﺓ(‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻭﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( > ]‪[LCD Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Color‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Backlight‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪SET‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫]‪[£ LCD/VF Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫]‪) [LCD Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫]‪) [VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫]‪) [Brightness: ±0‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [Contrast: ±0‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [Color: ±0‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [Sharpness: 2‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪(٢ :‬‬
‫]‪[Backlight: Normal‬‬
‫)ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [LCD Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ (LCD‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( )‪ ،(٩٩ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪/LCD) [LCD/VF B&W‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( > ]‪[LCD/VF B&W‬‬
‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫]‪[£ LCD/VF Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫]‪[LCD/VF B&W‬‬
‫)‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/LCD) [LCD/VF B&W‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ( )‪ ،(٩٩ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪ TB-1‬ﻟﻠﺤﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٠٫٩٥‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫)‪ ٣/٨‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‪ ٠٫٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٠٫٦٤‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ١/٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٠٫٦٤‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ١/٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪ TB-1‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫‪ ٠٫٦٤‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ١/٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺻﻼ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺰﻋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﻀﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺬﺑﻪ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ )ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ( ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻮﺍء‬
‫ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪START/STOP‬‬
‫)ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺎ ﻭﺁﻣ ًﻨﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٠٫٦٤‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ١/٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻒ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺰﻉ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ EXT 1‬ﻭ‪EXT 2‬‬
‫‪SYNC OUT‬‬
‫‪ GENLOCK‬ﻭ‪TIME CODE‬‬
‫‪HD/SD SDI‬‬
‫‪ CH1‬ﻭ‪CH2‬‬
‫)ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ XLR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫× )ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ(‬
‫‪DC IN‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫‪ REMOTE‬ﻭ‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫‪MIC‬‬
‫‪WFT‬‬
‫ﻧﺰﻉ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺟﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻗﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ )‪ 1 CompactFlash (CF‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ* ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SD .‬ﻭ‪ SDHC /‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺘﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .CF‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪ (٤٣ A‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ً SD‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ‪ Canon XF Utility‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ CF‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ I‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ *UDMA‬ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪ ٥١٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫* ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪ (UDMA‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،CF‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.UDMA‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪.CF‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .B‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﺎ ‪ ،CF‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﱢ‬
‫• ﻭﺳﻴﻨﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ (A‬ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ )ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪.(B‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ CF‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻋﻨﻮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ .CF2/CF3‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻔﺊ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﱢ‬
‫‪،١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫• ﻭﺳﻴﻨﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ (A‬ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ )ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪.(B‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫• ﻳﻨﺪﻓﻊ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪ CF2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ CF3‬ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪،٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Media Access LED‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LED‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻋﻨﻮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ SD‬ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﻫﻤﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ :SD‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Media Access LED‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LED‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Initialize Media‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Initialize Media‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [CF A‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [CF B‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [SD Card‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،(SD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫]‪) [Initialize Media‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Complete‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Quick‬ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪) [Complete‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،CF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Initialize Media‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ( )‪ ،(٩٩ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،CF‬ﻭﻫﻤﺎ ‪) CF2‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ (A‬ﻭ‪CF3‬‬
‫)ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .(B‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SLOT SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ Ð‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ Î‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SLOT SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ( ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WFT-E6‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ CF‬ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [SLOT SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،CF‬ﻭﻫﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ B‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ‪ CF‬ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Relay Rec‬ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Relay Rec‬ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻌًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Double Slot Rec‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪[Double Slot Rec‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪) [Relay Rec‬ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪[Double Slot Rec‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ(‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ ،(٥٥ A‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ‪ CF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ )ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ*( ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ‪ .CF‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ]‪) [Media‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ( )‪ ،(١٥٨ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ )‪.(٥٥ A‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .CF‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Yes‬ﻧﻌﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ FAT32‬ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،CF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [ABB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( > ]‪) [ABB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [ABB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻣﺮﻛﺒًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 23.98P‬ﺃﻭ ‪.24.00P‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪[Reset‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( > ]‪) [All Settings‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WFT-E6‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ ،Wi-Fi Remote‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪ .*Wi-Fi‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Wi-Fi Remote‬ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺘﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ ،Wi-Fi Remote‬ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WFT-E6‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ WFT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ "‪WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter - Guide‬‬
‫‪) "for Canon Camcorders‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ - WFT-E6‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪) (Canon‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ (PDF‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ .(٥٥ A‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ )‪.(١٦٢ A‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪.(٨٠ A‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )‪.(٣٢ A‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪.(٢٤ A‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(٤١ A) CF‬‬
‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪ (٤٤ A‬ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻌًﺎ )‪.(٤٤ A‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ )‪.(٣٤ ،٣٢ A‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪ (٨٥ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) CAMERA‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( )‪.(٢٦ A‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫• ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ]‪ [ÜREC‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ* ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ "ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪ (١٠١ A‬ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (٨٥ A‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ )‪ ،(٤٧ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [LIVE VIEW ON/OFF‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [STBY‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ( ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [ÜREC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪START/STOP‬‬
‫)ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪ CF2‬ﺃﻭ ‪CF3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ )‪ ،(١٣٢ A‬ﻭﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Rec Review‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( )‪ (٩٢ A‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Add $ Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ($‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Add % Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪،(٩٩ A) (%‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ %‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Clips‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ( > ]‪) [Delete Last Clip‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ( )‪(١٥٣ A‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [SDI Rec Command‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (SDI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،HD/SD SDI‬ﻓﺈﻧﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) C‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ( ﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻳﺔ )ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ*‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Q‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) CAMERA‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Wi-Fi Remote‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫*‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ )ﻳﻈﻞ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‬
‫ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [C‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺨﺼﺺ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻳﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦‬ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻓﻴﻦ )ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ( ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ .("AA0001" ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻛﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Clips‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ( > ]‪[Title Prefix‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ( ﻭ]‪) [Number Setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪ .(٤٤ A‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪ (١٠١ A‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪.(٨٥ A‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﺗﺪﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻛﻞ ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫)‪ (١١٠ A‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪١٢ ١٣‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٢٦ ٢٧ ٢٨ ٢٩‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪:(٢٨ A‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ )‪(٥٣ A‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪/CF‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ )‪(٥٣ A‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻌًﺎ )‪(٤٤ A‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF‬ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ*‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪(٦٣ A) ND‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(١٠٩ A‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪(١٠١ A‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪(٥١ A‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪(٦٦ A‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ (٤٧ A) ** Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ‪ -‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬؛ ﺃﺻﻔﺮ ‪ٍ -‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ٍ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪(٥٣ A‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ )‪(١١٠ A‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء )‪(٧٧ A‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪(٧٣ A‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ )‪(٩٧ A‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )‪(٥٥ A‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )‪(٥٥ A‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ )‪(١٣٠ A‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(١٥٥ A) SDI‬‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪(٨٥ A‬‬
‫ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪(٧٦ A‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪(١٣١ A‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪(٨٣ ،٨٢ A‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪(٦٤ A‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪(٦١ A) ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )‪(٧٠ A‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪(٥٨ A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ )‪(٧٠ A‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪(٨٢ A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪(٢٨ A‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫**ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WFT-E6‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) DISP.‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﺍ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ً ،‬‬
‫• ‪) ì ë ê é è‬ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ‪ ،ì‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪/CF‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫‪ 2/3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫‪ 4/5‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪.Ð‬‬
‫‪ ١١‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ÜREC‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫‪STBY‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬
‫‪ÜINT REC‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫‪) INT STBY‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ‪(INT‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ÜFRM REC‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ )ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪ÜFRM STBY‬‬
‫‪) FRM STBY‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ‪ (FRM‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ )ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ÜS&F REC‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫‪S&F STBY‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ )ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ((‬
‫‪ÜPRE REC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ )ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ((‬
‫‪PRE REC STBY‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻌًﺎ )‪ ،(٤٤ A‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ 4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪(٦٦ A‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ NDF :‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻗﻂ )‪/(٧٤ A‬‬
‫‪ EXT-LOCK‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ )‪/(٧٨ A‬‬
‫‪ HOLD‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪(٧٤ A‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪(٧٣ A‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪(٨٣ ،٨٢ A) ١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪(٦٦ A‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪(٦١ A) ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪/‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪/(٥٨ A‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪) ٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Speed‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Slow‬ﺑﻄﻲء( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ((‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Angle‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ((‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Clear Scan‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ((‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪(٦٦ A) ٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪(٦٧ A) ٣‬‬
‫‪ # ٨‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪(٦٤ A‬‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪(٦٣ A) ND‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪(٤٧ A) Wi-Fi ١١‬‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ً‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻡ ‪-‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WFT-E6‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪ ،١/١٠٠‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )ﺳﺎﻃﻊ( ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )ﻣﻌﺘﻢ( ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) CINEMA‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) CINEMA‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon Log‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ )‪ (١٠٩ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺪﻫﺶ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫]‪[/ CINEMA Locked‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺆﻣّﻦ(‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [/ CINEMA Locked‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺆﻣّﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( > ]‪) [/ CINEMA Locked‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺆﻣّﻦ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪) CINEMA‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ً‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [/ LOCKED‬ﻣﺆﻣّﻦ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،Canon Log‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ (١٠٩ A‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ( ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪ 24.00P‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PAL‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .NTSC‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪ 24.00P‬ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪.[24.00P‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪[24.00P‬‬
‫]‪[24.00P‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.24.00P‬‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ‪ NTSC/PAL‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪.[NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫]‪) [wOther Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪[NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫]‪[NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[PAL‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪*[PAL‬‬
‫*ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‪/‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Bit Rate/Resolution‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Bit Rate/Resolution‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Bit Rate/Resolution‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ(‬
‫]‪[50 Mbps 1920x1080‬‬
‫)‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪(١٩٢٠×١٠٨٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪ 24.00P‬ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫]‪ [59.94i‬ﺃﻭ ]‪*[50.00i‬‬
‫*ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ‪/‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ )‪.(NTSC/PAL/24.00P‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪.(١٢٧ A‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫]‪ [24.00P‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ*‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪CBR‬‬
‫‪(٤:٢:٢‬‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪VBR‬‬
‫‪(٤:٢:٠‬‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪CBR‬‬
‫‪(٤:٢:٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫]‪ [NTSC/PAL‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[NTSC‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫]‪ [NTSC/PAL‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[PAL‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫‪24.00P‬‬
‫‪59.94i‬‬
‫‪59.94P‬‬
‫‪29.97P‬‬
‫‪23.98P‬‬
‫‪50.00i‬‬
‫‪50.00P‬‬
‫‪25.00P‬‬
‫‪١٩٢٠ × ١٠٨٠‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١٢٨٠ × ٧٢٠‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١٩٢٠ × ١٠٨٠‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١٢٨٠ × ٧٢٠‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١٤٤٠ × ١٠٨٠‬‬
‫–‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ )ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(؛ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺳﻴﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍ )‪ ،(VBR‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺎ )‪ (CBR‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪ (٥٨ A‬ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ (٦٦ A‬ﻭﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(٦١ A) ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ FUNC.‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪SELECT‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺯﻣًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ٍ ٦‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪.ND‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ISO/Gain‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪/ISO‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ( ﻭﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ( )‪ ،(٩٩ A‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺿﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻇﻼﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [Speed‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺑﺄﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭ‪ ١/٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Angle‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Clear Scan‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ(‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ CRT‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫]‪) [Slow‬ﺑﻄﻲء(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ً‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫‪) ١Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪١/٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪١/٤‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫)ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ(‪١‬‬
‫‪Clear Scan‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪ 24.00P‬ﻭ‪(NTSC‬‬
‫‪59.94i / 59.94P‬‬
‫‪29.97P‬‬
‫‪١/٢٤‬‬
‫‪١/٣٠‬‬
‫‪١/٦٠‬‬
‫‪،١/٦٠ ،١/٥٠ ،١/٤٠ ،١/٣٠ ،١/٢٥‬‬
‫‪،١/٨٠ ،١/٦٠ ،١/٥٠ ،١/٤٠ ،١/٣٠ ،١/١٦٠ ،١/١٢٥ ،١/١٠٠ ،١/٨٠ ،١/٦٠‬‬
‫‪،١/٤٠٠ ،١/٣٢٠ ،١/٢٥٠ ،١/٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪،١/١٦٠ ،١/١٢٥ ،١/١٠٠ ،١/٨٠ ،١/٢٥٠ ،١/٢٠٠ ،١/١٦٠ ،١/١٢٥ ،١/١٠٠‬‬
‫‪،١/١٠٠٠ ،١/٨٠٠ ،١/٦٤٠ ،١/٥٠٠‬‬
‫‪،١/٤٠٠ ،١/٣٢٠ ،١/٢٥٠ ،١/٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪١/٢٠٠٠ ،١/١٦٠٠ ،١/١٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪،١/١٠٠٠ ،١/٨٠٠ ،١/٦٤٠ ،١/٥٠٠ ،١/٨٠٠ ،١/٦٤٠ ،١/٥٠٠ ،١/٤٠٠ ،١/٣٢٠‬‬
‫‪١/٢٠٠٠ ،١/١٦٠٠ ،١/١٢٥٠ ،١/١٠٠٠‬‬
‫‪١/٢٠٠٠ ،١/١٦٠٠ ،١/١٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪،١/١٢٠ ،١/١٠٠ ،١/٩٠ ،١/٧٥ ،١/٦٠‬‬
‫‪،١/٦٠ ،١/٤٨ ،١/٤٠ ،١/٣٤ ،١/٣٠ ،١/٢٤ ،١/٧٥ ،١/٦٠ ،١/٤٨ ،١/٤٠ ،١/٣٤ ،١/٣٠‬‬
‫‪،١/١٥٠ ،١/١٢٠ ،١/١٠٠ ،١/٩٠ ،١/٧٥ ،١/١٨٠ ،١/١٥٠ ،١/١٢٠ ،١/١٠٠ ،١/٩٠‬‬
‫‪،١/٢٥٠ ،١/٢١٠ ،١/١٨٠ ،١/١٥٠‬‬
‫‪،١/٣٠٠ ،١/٢٥٠ ،١/٢١٠ ،١/١٨٠‬‬
‫‪،١/٣٦٠ ،١/٣٠٠ ،١/٢٥٠ ،١/٢١٠‬‬
‫‪،١/٥٠٠ ،١/٤٢٠ ،١/٣٦٠ ،١/٣٠٠‬‬
‫‪،١/٦٠٠ ،١/٥٠٠ ،١/٤٢٠ ،١/٣٦٠‬‬
‫‪،١/٧٢٠ ،١/٦٠٠ ،١/٥٠٠ ،١/٤٢٠‬‬
‫‪،١/١٠٠٠ ،١/٨٤٠ ،١/٧٢٠ ،١/٦٠٠‬‬
‫‪،١/١٢٠٠ ،١/١٠٠٠ ،١/٧٢٠،١/٨٤٠‬‬
‫‪،١/١٤٠٠ ،١/١٢٠٠ ،١/١٠٠٠ ،١/٨٤٠ ١/٢٠٠٠ ،١/١٧٠٠ ،١/١٤٠٠ ،١/١٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪١/٢٠٠٠ ،١/١٧٠٠ ،١/١٤٠٠‬‬
‫‪١/٢٠٠٠ ،١/١٧٠٠‬‬
‫‪،°١٢٠ ،°١٨٠ ،°٢١٦ ،°٢٤٠ ،°٣٦٠‬‬
‫‪،°١٨٠ ،°٢٤٠ ،°٢٨٨ ،°٣٤٥٫٦ ،°٣٦٠‬‬
‫‪،°١٢٠ ،°١٨٠ ،°٢١٦ ،°٢٤٠ ،°٣٦٠‬‬
‫‪،°٧٢ ،°٨٦٫٤ ،°٩٠ ،°١٢٠ ،°١٤٤ ،°١٧٢٫٨ ،°٢٢٫٥ ،°٣٠ ،°٤٥ ،°٦٠ ،°٩٠ ،°١٠٨‬‬
‫‪،°١٥ ،°٢٢٫٥ ،°٣٠ ،°٤٥ ،°٦٠ ،°٩٠‬‬
‫‪°١١٫٢٥ ،°١٥‬‬
‫‪°١١٫٢٥ ،°١٥ ،°٢٢٫٥ ،°٣٠ ،°٤٥ ،°٦٠‬‬
‫‪°١١٫٢٥‬‬
‫‪ ٥٩٫٩٤‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٥٠٫٢٧‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٢٩٫٩٧‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٥٠٫٢٧‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٢٣٫٩٨‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٤٫٠٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢٥٠٫٢٧‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪١/١٥ ،١/٨ ،١/٤‬‬
‫‪١/١٢ ،١/٦ ،١/٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ(‪١‬‬
‫‪Slow‬‬
‫)ﺑﻄﻲء(‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫‪23.98P / 24.00P‬‬
‫‪١/٣٠ ،١/١٥ ،١/٨ ،١/٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪(PAL‬‬
‫‪25.00P‬‬
‫‪50.00i / 50.00P‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪١‬‬
‫‪١/٢٥‬‬
‫‪١/٥٠‬‬
‫‪،١/١٢٥ ،١/١٠٠ ،١/٨٠ ،١/٦٠ ،١/٥٠ ،١/٤٠ ،١/٣٠ ،١/٢٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪،١/٢٠٠ ،١/١٦٠ ،١/١٢٥ ،١/١٠٠ ،١/٨٠ ،١/٦٠ ،١/٥٠‬‬
‫‪،١/٦٤٠ ،١/٥٠٠ ،١/٤٠٠ ،١/٣٢٠ ،١/٢٥٠ ،١/٢٠٠ ،١/١٦٠ ،١/١٠٠٠ ،١/٨٠٠ ،١/٦٤٠ ،١/٥٠٠ ،١/٤٠٠ ،١/٣٢٠ ،١/٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪١/٢٠٠٠ ،١/١٦٠٠ ،١/١٢٥٠ ،١/١٠٠٠ ،١/٨٠٠‬‬
‫‪١/٢٠٠٠ ،١/١٦٠٠ ،١/١٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪،١/٩٠ ،١/٧٥ ،١/٦٠ ،١/٥٠ ،١/٤٠ ،١/٣٣ ،١/٢٩ ،١/٢٥‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪،١/١٥٠ ،١/١٢٠ ،١/١٠٠ ،١/٩٠ ،١/٧٥ ،١/٦٠ ،١/٥٠‬‬
‫‪،١/٣٠٠ ،١/٢٥٠ ،١/٢١٠ ،١/١٨٠ ،١/١٥٠ ،١/١٢٠ ،١/١٠٠ ،١/٥٠٠ ،١/٤٠٠ ،١/٣٥٠ ،١/٣٠٠ ،١/٢٥٠ ،١/٢١٠ ،١/١٨٠‬‬
‫‪ ١/٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪،١/١٠٠٠ ،١/٨٠٠ ،١/٧٠٠ ،١/٦٠٠ ،١/٥٠٠ ،١/٤٠٠ ،١/٣٥٠‬‬
‫‪،١/١٤٠٠ ،١/١٢٠٠ ،١/١٠٠٠ ،١/٨٠٠ ،١/٧٠٠ ،١/٦٠٠‬‬
‫‪١/٢٠٠٠ ،١/١٦٠٠ ،١/١٤٠٠ ،١/١٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪١/٢٠٠٠ ،١/١٦٠٠‬‬
‫‪) Angle‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ(‪١‬‬
‫‪،°٧٥ ،°٩٠ ،°١٢٠ ،°١٥٠ ،°١٨٠ ،°٢٤٠ ،°٣٠٠ ،°٣٦٠‬‬
‫‪،°٦٠ ،°٩٠ ،°١٢٠ ،°١٥٠ ،°١٨٠ ،°٢٤٠ ،°٣٠٠ ،°٣٦٠‬‬
‫‪°١١٫٢٥ ،°١٥ ،°٢٢٫٥ ،°٣٠ ،°٤٥ ،°٦٠‬‬
‫‪°١١٫٢٥ ،°١٥ ،°٢٢٫٥ ،°٣٠ ،°٤٥‬‬
‫‪Clear Scan‬‬
‫‪ ٢٥٫٠٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٥٠٫٧٨‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٥٠٫٠٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٥٠٫٧٨‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ(‪١‬‬
‫‪Slow‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫)ﺑﻄﻲء(‪٣‬‬
‫‪١/٢٥ ،١/١٢ ،١/٦ ،١/٣‬‬
‫‪١/١٢ ،١/٦ ،١/٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ ،Wi-Fi Remote‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭ‪ ١/٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ( ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( > ]‪) [Shutter‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( > ]‪) [Mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ(‬
‫]‪[~ Camera Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Shutter‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Speed‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ( )ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ؛ ﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Shutter Increment‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ(‬
‫]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( > ]‪) [Shutter‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( > ]‪[Shutter Increment‬‬
‫)ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ١/٣) [1/3 stop‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ ١/٤) [1/4 stop‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪SET‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Speed‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫)‪.(٥٧ A‬‬
‫]‪) [Shutter‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‬
‫]‪) [Shutter Increment‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [FUNC. Shutter‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ(‬
‫)‪ ،(٩٩ A‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺟﺎﻫﺰﻳﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ ١/٤) [1/4 stop‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ )‪ ،(٤٧ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [SPEED‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi Remote‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻮﺍء ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻫﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻟﻮﺟﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Speed‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ *١/٥٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ١/١٠٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫* ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ )‪ (٦٣ A‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Slow‬ﺑﻄﻲء(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻞ )‪.(٦١ A‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪ ،[C9: EOS Std.‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ SLR‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ EOS‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪) Fine‬ﺩﻗﻴﻖ(‬
‫‪*٢٠٠٠٠ ،١٢٨٠٠ ،٦٤٠٠ ،٣٢٠٠ ،١٦٠٠ ،**<٨٥٠> ،٨٠٠ ،٤٠٠ ،*٣٢٠‬‬
‫‪،٥٠٠٠ ،٤٠٠٠ ،٣٢٠٠ ،٢٥٠٠ ،٢٠٠٠ ،١٦٠٠ ،١٢٥٠ ،١٠٠٠ ،**<٨٥٠> ،٨٠٠ ،٦٤٠ ،٥٠٠ ،٤٠٠ ،٣٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠٠٠ ،١٦٠٠٠ ،١٢٨٠٠ ،١٠٠٠٠ ،٨٠٠٠ ،٦٤٠٠‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ ٣- ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ ٠ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ ٣ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ ٦ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ ٩ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ ١٢ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ ١٥ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ ١٨ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪،‬‬‫‪ ٢١‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ ٢٤ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ ٣٠ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٠٫٥‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫* ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫**ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ .Canon Log‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٢٫٥‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻓﻲ ‪) ISO Speed/Gain‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪/ISO‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( > ]‪/ISO) [ISO/Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ( >‬
‫]‪) [Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [ISO‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ]‪) [ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [ISO Increment‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ (ISO‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( > ]‪/ISO/Gain] (ISO‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ( >‬
‫]‪) [ISO Increment‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ١) [1 stop‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ ١/٣) [1/3 stop‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫)‪.(٥٧ A‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‪:‬‬
‫]‪[~ Camera Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫]‪/ISO) [ISO/Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‬
‫]‪) [Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫]‪[ISO‬‬
‫]‪[~ Camera Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫]‪/ISO/Gain] (ISO‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‬
‫]‪) [ISO Increment‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫]‪ ١/٣) [1/3 stop‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( > ]‪/ISO) [ISO/Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ( >‬
‫]‪) [Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ( )ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Fine‬ﺩﻗﻴﻖ( )ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ٠٫٥‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫)‪.(٥٧ A‬‬
‫]‪[~ Camera Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫]‪/ISO) [ISO/Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‬
‫]‪) [Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‬
‫]‪) [Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/ISO) [FUNC. ISO/Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ( )‪ ،(٩٩ A‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪/ISO‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺟﺎﻫﺰﻳﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪/ISO) [ISO/Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ( ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪/ISO‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Control Dial‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Custom Function‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫> ]‪) [Control Dial‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/ISO/Gain] (ISO‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [wOther Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪[Custom Function‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪[Custom Function‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( > ]‪) [Control Dial Dir.‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Grip Ctrl Dial Dir.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ( )‪ (١١٠ A‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Control Dial‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬
‫‪) [Iris] #‬ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ(‪$ ،‬‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ )‪ ،(٤٧ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪/ISO‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [ISO‬ﺛﻢ ]‪) [Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ( ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi Remote‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪/ISO 12800‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ُﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ )‪ (٥٨ A‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪/ISO‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ND‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ND‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ*‪.‬‬
‫* ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻭﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ )‪.(٥٨ A‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ND‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ + ND FILTER‬ﺃﻭ ‪ -‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ + ND FILTER‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ٢ ND1) [ND1 2 stops] :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ( ‬
‫]‪ ٤ ND2) [ND2 4 stops‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ( ]‪ ٦ ND3) [ND3 6 stops‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ( ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪) .ND‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ - ND FILTER‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ )‪ (٤٧ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [ND +‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [ND -‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭﻱ ‪ + ND FILTER‬ﻭ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi Remote‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ .ND‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫)‪.(٦٦ A‬‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ #‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻳﻌﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺭﺍﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Iris‬ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ( ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Control Dial‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Custom Function‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫> ]‪) [Control Dial‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬
‫]‪) [wOther Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪[Custom Function‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Iris‬ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Control Dial‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Iris Increment‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( > ]‪) [Iris‬ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ( > ]‪[Iris Increment‬‬
‫)ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ١/٢) [1/2 stop‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ ١/٣) [1/3 stop‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Fine‬ﺩﻗﻴﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Iris‬ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ(‬
‫]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫]‪) [Iris‬ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ(‬
‫]‪) [Iris Increment‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( > ]‪) [Iris‬ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ( >‬
‫]‪) [Iris Increment‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Fine‬ﺩﻗﻴﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ ١/٣) [1/3 stop‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Custom Function‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( > ]‪[Control Dial Dir.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Grip Ctrl Dial Dir.‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ( )‪ (١١٠ A‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ )‪ ،(٤٧ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) IRIS [+‬ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ ]‪ ([+‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ]‪) IRIS [-‬ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ ]‪ ([-‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑـ ‪ ١/٨‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi Remote‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[~ Camera Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( > ]‪) [Iris‬ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ( > ]‪) [Zoom-Iris Correct.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺰﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ( ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻤﺎ ‪ ÅA‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ÅB‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٠٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ‪ ١٥٠٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ¼ )ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ٥٤٠٠ ،‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٩‬‬
‫)ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‪ ٣٢٠٠ ،‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ]‪) [Color Matrix‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ﻭ]‪) [White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( )‪ (١٠٧ A‬ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Custom Function‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( > ]‪[Shockless WB‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺻﻄﺪﺍﻡ( )‪ (١١٠ A‬ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )‪.(٥٧ A‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ‪ ÅA‬ﺃﻭ ‪:ÅB‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ‪ ÅA‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ÅB‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )‪ ٥٥٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ( ﺑﺒﻂء‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺻﻮﺏ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Å‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ Å A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Å B‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻗﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺳﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪ ¼ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٩‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Å‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪ ±0‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.±0‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ )ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٠٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ‪ ١٥٠٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Å‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )‪ ٥٥٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ( ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ )ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،(٩٩ A) [FUNC. WB‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺟﺎﻫﺰﻳﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ )‪ ،(٤٧ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [ÅA‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ¼ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]‪±0‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫[ )¼‪،‬‬
‫( ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ]‪ ٥٥٠٠) [5500K‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ( )‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi Remote‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ÅA‬ﺃﻭ ‪:ÅB‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺻﻮﺏ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Å‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ]‪ [Å‬ﺑﺒﻂء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ]‪ [Å‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻗﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻭﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ Å‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ )ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﻄﻲء(‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ‪ #‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ ،EF‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .AF‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ MF‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪#‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ )‪ ،(٤٧ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ]‪) [NEAR‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ( ﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫]‪) [FAR‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ( ﻹﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ‪ [ ]/[ ] -‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﻭ] [‪ [ ]/‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،MF‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﻭﻫﻤﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Custom Function‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( > ]‪[F. Assist. B&W‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ( )‪ (١١٠ A‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺬﺭﻭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( )ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪) [Peaking‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ(( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( > ]‪) [Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫)ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪) [Peaking‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ((‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪[£ LCD/VF Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫]‪) [Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫)ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪) [Peaking‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ((‬
‫]‪) [Peaking 1‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ‪(١‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) PEAKING‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ )‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (K‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( > ]‪) [Peaking‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ^ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ*‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MAGN.‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( > ]‪) [Peaking 1‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ‪ (١‬ﻭ]‪[Peaking 2‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ‪ (٢‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺗﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪ .(٨٨ A‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺤﺎﻁ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Markers‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( > ]‪[Markers‬‬
‫)ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [White‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Gray‬ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Safety Zone‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Aspect Marker‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٣‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫]‪[£ LCD/VF Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫]‪) [Markers‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫]‪) [Center‬ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻂ(‬
‫]‪) [Horizontal‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ(‬
‫]‪) [Grid‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [Safety Zone‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [Aspect Marker‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Safety Zone Area‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Aspect Ratio‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫]‪) [Center‬ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻂ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Horizontal‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻂ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﻭﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Grid‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ ﻻﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫]‪[Safety Zone‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻟـ ]‪) [Safety Zone Area‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ( ﻫﻲ ]‪ [٪٩٥‬ﻭ]‪ [٪٩٢٫٥‬ﻭ]‪ [٪٩٠‬ﻭ]‪.[٪٨٠‬‬
‫]‪ [Aspect Marker‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟـ ]‪) [Aspect Ratio‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻫﻲ ]‪ [2.35:1‬ﻭ]‪ [1.85:1‬ﻭ]‪ [1.75:1‬ﻭ]‪ [1.66:1‬ﻭ]‪ [14:9‬ﻭ]‪ [13:9‬ﻭ]‪.[4:3‬‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪٪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٤:٣‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Markers‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ( )‪ ،(٩٩ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ )‪ ٪٥±‬ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻴﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[£ LCD/VF Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫]‪) [Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫)ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪) [Zebra‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ((‬
‫]‪[Zebra 1‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪(١‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ]‪) [Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( > ]‪) [Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫)ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪) [Zebra‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ((‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Zebra 1‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Zebra 2‬ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪ (٢‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Zebra 1&2‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ،(٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( > ]‪[Zebra 1 Level‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Zebra 2 Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪(٢‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ZEBRA‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ( ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Zebra‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫•‬
‫‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( > ]‪) [HD Output‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ (HD‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) HD/SD SDI‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HD‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪SYNC OUT‬‬
‫)ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ HD-Y‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) HDMI OUT‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ HD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HD/SD SDI‬ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ .(٧٩ A) TIME CODE‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ .SYNC OUT‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪ ،NTSC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )‪.(٧٧ A‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ]‪) [Mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [¤ TC/UB Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) [Time Code] > (TC/UB‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( >‬
‫]‪) [Mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Regen.‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Preset‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ( ﻭﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Preset‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ]‪[Run‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [¤ TC/UB Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) [Time Code] > (TC/UB‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( >‬
‫]‪) [Run‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫]‪ [Preset‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ(‪ :‬ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻫﻲ ‪ .٠٠:٠٠:٠٠٫٠٠‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Run‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[Rec Run‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪ :[Free Run‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[¤ TC/UB Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪(TC/UB‬‬
‫]‪) [Time Code‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫]‪) [Mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ(‬
‫]‪) [Regen.‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء(‬
‫]‪[¤ TC/UB Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪(TC/UB‬‬
‫]‪) [Time Code‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫]‪) [Run‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [Rec Run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪ [Regen.‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء(‪ :‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .CF‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Preset‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[¤ TC/UB Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪(TC/UB‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ]‪) [Setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [¤ TC/UB Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) [Time Code] > (TC/UB‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( >‬
‫]‪) [Setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫]‪) [Time Code‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[00:00:00.00‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Free Run‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ‪.00:00:00.00‬‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ )‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫( ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ( ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CANCEL‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Free Run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪ [NTSC/PAL‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪ ،[NTSC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (DF‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫)‪(NDF‬؛ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (NDF‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪ [NTSC/PAL‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[PAL‬‬‫ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪ [24.00P‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬‫ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪ [NTSC/PAL‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[NTSC‬‬‫ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪23.98P‬‬
‫]‪[¤ TC/UB Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪(TC/UB‬‬
‫]‪) [Time Code‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫]‪[DF/NDF‬‬
‫]‪[DF‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪.[DF/NDF‬‬
‫]‪) [¤ TC/UB Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) [Time Code] > (TC/UB‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(> ]‪[DF/NDF‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [DF‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [NDF‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [DF‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ]‪[00:00:00.00‬؛ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [NDF‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ]‪.[00:00:00:00‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Time Code Hold‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( )‪ ،(٩٩ A‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ*‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ [H‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [HOLD‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HD/SD SDI‬ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ .TIME CODE‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Regen.‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء(‪.‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Preset‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ( ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Rec Run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Preset‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ( ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Free Run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻼ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪ [24.00P‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[23.98P‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .٢٣‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [25.00P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [50.00i‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[50.00P‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .٢٤‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪[Free Run‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ(‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [Free Run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪) [Free Run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Time Code‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( )‪ ،(٩٩ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫]‪) [¤ TC/UB Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) [Time Code] > (TC/UB‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٨‬ﺃﺣﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺪﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻓﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.F‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[¤ TC/UB Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪(TC/UB‬‬
‫]‪) [User Bit‬ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [Type‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪) [Type‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [¤ TC/UB Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) [User Bit] > (TC/UB‬ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( >‬
‫]‪) [Type‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ(‬
‫]‪) [Setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[00 00 00 00‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ )‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫( ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CANCEL‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HD/SD SDI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺮﺭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ* ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ GENLOCK‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻛﺈﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.SYNC OUT‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ .TIME CODE‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ TIME CODE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪GENLOCK‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪SYNC OUT‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪TIME CODE‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪GENLOCK‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ )ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ )ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،GENLOCK‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺘﻲ ‪) V‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ( ﻭ‪) H‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .٠‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ‪) H‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) H ٠٫٤±‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Genlock Adjust.‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Genlock Adjust.‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪SET‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫( ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ )‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪) [Genlock Adjust.‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء(‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ‪ LTC‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ SMPTE‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ TIME CODE‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ TIME CODE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Free Run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ( )‪.(٧٣ A‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [TC In/Out‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [¤ TC/UB Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) [Time Code] > (TC/UB‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( >‬
‫]‪) [TC In/Out‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪(TC‬‬
‫]‪[¤ TC/UB Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪(TC/UB‬‬
‫]‪) [Time Code‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫]‪[TC In/Out‬‬
‫)ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫]‪) [In‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [In‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪) [Rec Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [¤ TC/UB Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) [User Bit] > (TC/UB‬ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( >‬
‫]‪) [Rec Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [External‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫]‪[¤ TC/UB Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪(TC/UB‬‬
‫]‪) [User Bit‬ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‬
‫]‪) [Rec Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [Internal‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ(‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ U‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺖ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ [NDF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ .TIME CODE‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ؛ ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬‫ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬‫ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫]‪) [¤ TC/UB Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) [Time Code] > (TC/UB‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ [EXT-LOCK‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺈﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ )ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ SYNC OUT‬ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [SYNC Output‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪.(SYNC‬‬
‫]‪) [¢ Video Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( > ]‪) [SYNC Output‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪(SYNC‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [HD Sync‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) *[Blk Burst‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪.24.00P‬‬
‫]‪) [¢ Video Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫]‪) [SYNC Output‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪(SYNC‬‬
‫]‪) [Composite‬ﻣﺮﻛﺐ(‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ TIME CODE‬ﻛﺈﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ‪ LTC‬ﺑﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .SMPTE‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [¤ TC/UB Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) [Time Code] > (TC/UB‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( > ]‪) [TC In/Out‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Out‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ TIME CODE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ )‪ .(٧٨ A‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [¢ Video Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫> ]‪) [SDI Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ (SDI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [HD‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [SD‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.HD/SD SDI‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺈﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪ [24.00P‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [23.98P‬ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [¤ TC/UB Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪> (TC/UB‬‬
‫]‪) [User Bit‬ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( > ]‪) [Output Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Pulldown‬ﻣﻨﺴﺪﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ ‪.٢:٣‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 23.98P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 24.00P‬ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،HD/SD SDI‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 59.94i / 59.94P‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 60.00i / 60.00P‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ ‪ .٢:٣‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ )ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ (٢:٣‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ 1080/23.98P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1080/24.00P‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ PCM‬ﺧﻄﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٤٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،XLR‬ﻭﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ (MIC‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ )ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ .(XLR‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،XLR‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ )‪XLR (CH1/CH2‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪/١‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ (٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ،XLR‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ MIC‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺜﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ∅*‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪ ،PAL‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ XLR‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪.(4‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪ ،(1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪.(2‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪.(3‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ XLR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )‪ (4‬ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.(5) MIC‬‬
‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪XLR‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪MIC‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ(‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪XLR‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ XLR‬ﻭﻫﻤﺎ ‪) CH1‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ (١‬ﻭ‪) CH2‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ ،(٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ MIC‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ .XLR‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،XLR‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.MIC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻭﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪CH1/CH2‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪/١‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(٢‬‬
‫‪ã‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ XLR‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) LINE‬ﺍﻟﺨﻂ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) MIC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﻫﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ً MIC+48V‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ XLR‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) CH1‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪.(١‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪XLR‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫‪CH1/CH2‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪/١‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(٢‬‬
‫‪ã‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [XLR Rec Channel‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪.(XLR‬‬
‫]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪) [Audio Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( >‬
‫]‪) [XLR Rec Channel‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪(XLR‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫]‪) [CH1‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ :(١‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ‪) CH1‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ (١‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ ،١‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪) CH2‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ (٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ‪) CH1‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ (١‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫]‪[CH1/CH2‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪/١‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ :(٢‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ‪) CH2‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [Audio Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫]‪[XLR Rec Channel‬‬
‫)ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪(XLR‬‬
‫]‪) [CH1‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(١‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻫﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ XLR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) MIC‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ( ﺃﻭ ‪LINE‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺨﻂ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ MIC+48V‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪XLR‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ XLR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ ã‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪) CH1‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ (١‬ﻭ‪) CH2‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ (٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪) [Audio Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( >‬
‫]‪) [XLR ALC Link‬ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ (XLR ALC‬ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻜﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ‪ G-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٨‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪CH1/CH2‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪/١‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(٢‬‬
‫‪ã‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪CH1/CH2‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪/١‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(٢‬‬
‫‪ã‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ ã‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.M‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ ã‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺎﻇﺮ ‪ ٠‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ G-‬ﻭﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻭﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫‪ ١٨+‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬
‫ﺣﻴﻦ ﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ١٨‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ٍ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ XLR‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪CH1/CH2‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪/١‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(٢‬‬
‫‪ã‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ‪ ٤-‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪) [Audio Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( >‬
‫]‪) [Limiter‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺃﻇﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Audio Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( )‪ ،(٩٩ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ XLR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) MIC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ( ﺃﻭ ‪.MIC+48V‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ XLR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪) [Audio Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪) [XLR1 Mic Trimming‬ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪(XLR1‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪) [XLR2 Mic Trimming‬ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪(XLR2‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢+‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ‪ ٦+‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ ٦-‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ ١٢-‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [Audio Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫]‪[XLR1 Mic Trimming‬‬
‫)ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪(XLR1‬‬
‫]‪[XLR2 Mic Trimming‬‬
‫)ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪(XLR2‬‬
‫]‪) [0 dB‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪XLR‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) MIC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ( ﺃﻭ ‪.MIC+48V‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ XLR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪) [Audio Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( >‬
‫]‪) [XLR1 Mic Att.‬ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ (XLR1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[XLR2 Mic Att.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪(XLR2‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) MIC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪MIC‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٩٩‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [MIC Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪) [Audio Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( >‬
‫]‪) [MIC Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Automatic‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Automatic‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [MIC Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪) [Audio Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( >‬
‫]‪) [MIC Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ(‬
‫( ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ )‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬
‫ﺣﻴﻦ ﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ١٨‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ٍ‬
‫]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [Audio Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫]‪[XLR1 Mic Att.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪(XLR1‬‬
‫]‪[XLR2 Mic Att.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪(XLR2‬‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [¡Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [Audio Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [MIC Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ(‬
‫]‪) [Automatic‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫]‪) [¡AudioSetup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [Audio Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [MIC Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ(‬
‫]‪[50‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪[Audio Input‬‬
‫)ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪) [Limiter‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺃﻇﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Audio Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( )‪ ،(٩٩ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌًﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [MIC Att.‬ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪) [Audio Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( >‬
‫]‪) [MIC Att.‬ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ(‬
‫]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [Audio Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫]‪[MIC Att.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ* ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ × )ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ( ﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻱ ‪) HEADPHONE +/-‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪ ،PAL‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫×)ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ(‬
‫• ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[¡ Audio Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪) [Audio Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪[Headphone Volume‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭﺍ ‪HEADPHONE -/+‬‬
‫)ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Canon XF Utility‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.(٤٧ A) Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫‪Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﺊ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻲ )‪ :(GPS‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٢Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪/ISO‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫–‪٣‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺪﺓ )‪ :(UMID‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.SMPTE‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫)‪(١٥٥ A‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ً SD‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻲ )‪ (GPS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Canon XF Utility‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ )‪ .(١٣٢ A‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.(١٣٨ A) Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Canon XF Utility‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫• ﻭﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ]‪) [Setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Set Metadata‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ(‬
‫> ]‪) [Setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [SD Card‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،(SD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [User Memo‬ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Set Metadata‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ(‬
‫> ]‪) [User Memo‬ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ Q‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ ،SD‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪[Set Metadata‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ(‬
‫]‪) [Setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫]‪) [SD Card‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SD‬‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪[Set Metadata‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ(‬
‫]‪) [User Memo‬ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ )‪ ،(٤٧ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ .Wi-Fi Remote‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ ،Wi-Fi Remote‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺗﺎﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺰﻳﺪﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ :Canon XF Utility‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺂﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ؛ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻲ )‪ (GPS‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪) [Metadata Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪Activate‬‬
‫[ )ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Set Metadata‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ(‬
‫> ]‪) [Setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Remote‬ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻣﻸ ﺣﻘﻮﻝ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻲ )‪ (GPS‬ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Clear‬ﻣﺴﺢ( ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺣﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [Metadata correctly transferred‬ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi Remote‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫]‪ [Apply from Next‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪ Wi-Fi Remote‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪:‬‬
‫]‪ [Overwrite Prev.‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪ Wi-Fi Remote‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ )ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪ Wi-Fi Remote‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫]‪[Overwrite‬‬
‫)ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ(‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ(‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Wi-Fi Remote‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Set Metadata‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ( > ]‪) [Setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Wi-Fi Remote‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HD/SD SDI‬‬
‫ﻭﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻭﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ١SYNC OUT‬ﻭﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ × )ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ(‪.٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ‪ SMPTE‬ﻭﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪EBU‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )‪ (HDTV‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪.ARIB‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ]‪) [Type‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( > ]‪) [Color Bars‬ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( >‬
‫]‪) [Type‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[~ Camera Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫]‪) [Color Bars‬ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫]‪) [Type‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ(‬
‫]‪[SMPTE‬‬
‫]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( > ]‪) [Color Bars‬ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( >‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Color Bars‬‬
‫•‬
‫)ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( )‪ ،(٩٩ A‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[~ Camera Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫]‪) [Color Bars‬ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [1 kHz Tone‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪) [Audio Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( >‬
‫]‪) [1 kHz Tone‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ ١٢-‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻭ‪ ١٨-‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻭ‪ ٢٠-‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪START/‬‬
‫‪) STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [Audio Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [1 kHz Tone‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺴﻄﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ* ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) WFM‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪EDGE MON.‬‬
‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) WFM‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ( ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫> ])‪) [WFM (LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) [Setting] > ((LCD‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [WFM‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ]‪ [VS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Edge Mon.‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ])‪) [WFM (LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) [Waveform Monitor] > ((LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ(‬
‫])‪[WFM (LCD‬‬
‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪((LCD‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Waveform Monitor‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ( ﺿﻤﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ])‪) [WFM (LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) [Gain] > ((LCD‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ( )ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪) [Waveform Monitor‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ((‬
‫]‪[Waveform Monitor‬‬
‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [Line‬ﺍﻟﺨﻂ(‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [1x‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[2x‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫]‪) [Line‬ﺍﻟﺨﻂ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Line+Spot‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‪+‬ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [Field‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ(‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [RGB‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‪:‬‬
‫]‪:[YPbPr‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪) [Line‬ﺍﻟﺨﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪.YPbPr‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Vectorscope‬ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ])‪) [WFM (LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) [Vectorscope] > ((LCD‬ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫])‪[WFM (LCD‬‬
‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪((LCD‬‬
‫]‪) [Vectorscope‬ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ(‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ])‪) [WFM (LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) [Gain] > ((LCD‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ( )ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪) [Vectorscope‬ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ((‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [1x‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[5x‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫]‪[Spot‬‬
‫)ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪:‬‬
‫]‪[Normal‬‬
‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪) [Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )‪ .(٧٠ A‬ﻭﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Edge Monitor‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ])‪) [WFM (LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) [Edge Monitor] > ((LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪.٤‬‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫])‪[WFM (LCD‬‬
‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪((LCD‬‬
‫]‪) [Edge Monitor‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [Type 1‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(١‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ( ﺿﻤﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [wOther Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ])‪) [WFM (LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) [Gain] > ((LCD‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ( )ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪) [Edge Monitor‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ((‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫]‪[Type 1‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪:(١‬‬
‫]‪[Type 2‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪:(٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ]‪) [Line+Spot‬ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‪+‬ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ "ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ" )!(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ؛‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ (") ١‬ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ ،(#) ٢‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫)‪ ($‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ )‪ (%‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ )‪ .(١٢٤ A‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ )‪(١٢٣ A‬؛ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ً‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Add Shot Mark 1‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪(١‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Add Shot Mark 2‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Add Shot Mark 1‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Add Shot Mark 2‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪(٢‬‬
‫)‪.(٩٩ A‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Add Shot Mark 1‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ (١‬ﻭﺯﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Add Shot Mark 2‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ )ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ " ﻭ‪ #‬ﻣﻌًﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ )‪ (٤٧ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ )" ﺃﻭ ‪ (#‬ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪.Remote‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [SHOT MARK1‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ (١‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Wi-Fi Remote‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪) [SHOT MARK2‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ (٢‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪.٢‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [SHOT MARK1‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [SHOT MARK2‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ (2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٫٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ ،Wi-Fi Remote‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ! ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ %‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( )‪ ($‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ )‪ (%‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰﻩ ﻭﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ %‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫)‪ .(١١٤ A‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪.$‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Add $ Mark‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ %‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫)ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ($‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Add % Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪.(%‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Add $ Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ($‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Add % Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪.(٩٩ A) (%‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻼ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ )ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Add $ Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ($‬ﻭﺯﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Add % Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪.(%‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ )‪ ،(٤٧ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﺃﻭ ‪ %‬ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [$ MARK‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ($‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Wi-Fi Remote‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [% MARK‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ (%‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪.%‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [OK Mark‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Check Mark‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Wi-Fi Remote‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ %‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Rec Review‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Rec Review‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪) [Rec Review‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [Entire Clip‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.u‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [Ð REVIEW‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CANCEL‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Entire Clip‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [Last 4 sec‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‪:‬‬
‫)ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ )‪ ،(٩٣ A‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ‪ CF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ )]‪ :([Interval Rec‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )]‪ :([Frame Rec‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ )]‪ :([Slow & Fast Motion‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ )]‪ :([Pre Rec‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Interval‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Interval Rec‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ(‬
‫> ]‪) [Interval‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Interval Rec‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ(‬
‫]‪) [Interval‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ(‬
‫]‪ ١) [1 sec‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rec Frames‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪SET‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٦‬ﻭ‪ ٩‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪ [24.00P‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[On‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [23.98P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [29.97P‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫]‪ ([59.94i‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﻭ‪ ٦‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ‪ً ١٢‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [25.00P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [50.00i‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪ [50.00P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.([59.94P‬‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪) [Interval Rec‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ(‬
‫]‪) [Rec Frames‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ٍ ٥‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ٍ ٦‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ٍ ٧‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ٍ ٨‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ٍ ٩‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Special Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Special Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Interval Rec‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ [INT STBY‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻭﻳﻮﻣﺾ ]‪.([INT‬‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪) [Special Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ(‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ]‪ [INT STBY‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [Ü INT REC‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [Ü INT STBY‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ [INT STBY‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻭﻳﻮﻣﺾ ]‪.([INT‬‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪ [24.00P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [NTSC/PAL‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Bit Rate/Resolution‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪ (٧٣ A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Free Run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Rec Run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ TIME CODE‬ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.HD/SD SDI‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Rec Frames‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Frame Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( >‬
‫]‪) [Rec Frames‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻫﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٦‬ﻭ‪ ٩‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪ [24.00P‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[On‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [23.98P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [29.97P‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫]‪ ([59.94i‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﻭ‪ ٦‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ‪ً ١٢‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [25.00P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [50.00i‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪ [50.00P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.([59.94P‬‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪) [Frame Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [Rec Frames‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪[1‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Special Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Special Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Frame Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ [FRM STBY‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻭﻳﻮﻣﺾ ]‪.([FRM‬‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪) [Special Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ(‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ]‪ [FRM STBY‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [Ü FRM REC‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [Ü FRM STBY‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﱢ‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Special Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Special Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ(‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ [STBY‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪ [24.00P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [NTSC/PAL‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Bit Rate/Resolution‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪ (٧٣ A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Free Run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Rec Run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ TIME CODE‬ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.HD/SD SDI‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ )‪ ،(٥٥ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١/٢٫٥‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ )ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [S&F Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪[Slow & Fast Motion‬‬
‫)ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ( > ]‪) [S&F Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫]‪[Slow & Fast Motion‬‬
‫)ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[S&F Frame Rate‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪NTSC / 24.00P‬‬
‫‪١٩٢٠ × ١٠٨٠‬‬
‫‪١٢٨٠ × ٧٢٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪١٩٢٠ × ١٠٨٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪١٢٨٠ × ٧٢٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪PAL‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Special Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Special Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ(‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Slow & Fast Motion‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ [S&F STBY‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪) [Special Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ(‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ]‪ [S&F STBY‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [Ü S&F REC‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ [S&F STBY‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪ [24.00P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [NTSC/PAL‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Bit Rate/Resolution‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ ،(٥٥ A‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪ (٧٣ A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Free Run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Rec Run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ TIME CODE‬ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.HD/SD SDI‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﺘﻀﻤﻦ ً‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪) [Special Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ(‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Special Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Special Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Pre Rec‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ [PRE REC STBY‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ]‪ [PRE REC STBY‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [Ü PRE REC‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪START/STOP‬‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫)ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ [PRE REC STBY‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪ [24.00P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [NTSC/PAL‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Bit Rate/Resolution‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ (٧٣ A‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Free Run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺯﺭﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ‪ً *١٥‬‬
‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Assign Button‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Assign Button‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ(‬
‫]‪) [Assign Button‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.١٥‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ])‪) [User Setting (NONE‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺑﻼ((‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪SET‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ])‪) [User Setting (NONE‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)ﺑﻼ((‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ ١) [1 Magnification‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫]‪ ٢) [2 Peaking‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ(‬
‫]‪ ٣) [3 Zebra‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫])‪ ٤) [4 WFM (LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )‪((LCD‬‬
‫]‪ ٥) [5 Headphone +‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪(+‬‬
‫]‪ ٦) [6 Headphone -‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪(-‬‬
‫]‪ ٧) [7 Magnification‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫])‪ ٨) [8 WFM (LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )‪((LCD‬‬
‫]‪ ٩) [9 Edge Monitor‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ(‬
‫])‪) ١٥-١٠) [10-15 (NONE‬ﺑﻼ((‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ]‪) [Assign Button‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ( )‪ (١٥٧ A‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( > ]‪) [Assignable Buttons‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫]‪) [Peaking‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫]‪) [Zebra‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫])‪) [WFM (LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )‪((LCD‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪) Waveform monitor‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ( ‪) Vectorscope I‬ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ( ‪) Off I‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫]‪) [Edge Monitor‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫]‪) [Magnification‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫]‪) [Color Bars‬ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫]‪) [Markers‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [LCD Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [LCD Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.(LCD‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫]‪) [VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫]‪[LCD/VF B&W‬‬
‫)‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫]‪[Onscreen Display‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ HD‬ﻭ‪.(SD‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫]‪[Add Shot Mark 1‬‬
‫)ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪(١‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ " ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫]‪[Add Shot Mark 2‬‬
‫)ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪*(٢‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ #‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫]‪) [Add $ Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪($‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫]‪) [Add % Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪(%‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ %‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫]‪) [Time Code Hold‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(*‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫]‪) [Headphone +‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪(+‬‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫]‪) [Headphone -‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪(-‬‬
‫ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫]‪) [Audio Output CH‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫]‪) [Audio Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪٨٣ ،٨٢‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫]‪) [Time Code‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Time Code‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(* ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻀﺎﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ‪) FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ( ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [FUNC. Shutter‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫]‪[FUNC. ISO/Gain‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪/ISO‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫]‪) [FUNC. WB‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫]‪) [My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ]‪) [My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫]‪[Initialize Media‬‬
‫)ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Initialize Media‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫])‪[User Setting (NONE‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺑﻼ((*‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫* ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ .(١٠٤ A‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻻﺣﻖ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻞ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ C300‬ﻭ‪ C300 PL‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( >‬
‫]‪) [/ CINEMA Locked‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺆﻣّﻦ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CUSTOM PICTURE‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ -‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[Off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [- / Select File‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑـ ]‪ [C1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪[C9‬؛ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑـ ]‪ [SD1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[SD20‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CUSTOM PICTURE‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ]‪ [C8‬ﻭ]‪ .[C9‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )‪(١٠٢ A‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [C8: CINEMA‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ(‪ :‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon Log‬ﻭﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺭﺍﺋﻊ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﺑﻀﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ( ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ EOS‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪SLR‬‬
‫]‪: [C9: EOS Std.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻈﻬﺮﻫﺎ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ٍ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ( ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫)‪ EOS‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [, / Edit File‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ )‪ (١٠٤ A‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CUSTOM PICTURE‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [NEUTRAL‬ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ( ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻳﺪﺓ )ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪) [CINEMA‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ EOS) [EOS Std.‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Rename‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [, / Edit File‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( > ]‪) [Rename‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ(‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [, / Edit File‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [Rename‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﺣﺮﻓﺎ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳًﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ً‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ )‪ (Ð‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ّ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CUSTOM PICTURE‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Protect‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [, / Edit File‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( > ]‪) [Protect‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [, / Edit File‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [Protect‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Protect‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ‪ i‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Unprotect‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CUSTOM PICTURE‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]* ‪[Copy To‬‬
‫)ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ (SD‬ﺃﻭ ]* ‪) [Load From‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،(SD‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪) [Copy To Cam.‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Load From Cam‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]* ‪) [Copy To‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(SD‬‬
‫]‪) [+ / Transfer File‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ( > ]* ‪) [Copy To‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SD‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [New File‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [+ / Transfer File‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫]* ‪) [Copy To‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SD‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CUSTOM PICTURE‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]* ‪[Load From‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(SD‬‬
‫]‪) [+ / Transfer File‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( > ]* ‪[Load From‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SD‬‬
‫]‪) [+ / Transfer File‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫]* ‪) [Load From‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SD‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CUSTOM PICTURE‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Copy To Cam.‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [+ / Transfer File‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( > ]‪) [Copy To Cam.‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [+ / Transfer File‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [Copy To Cam.‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CUSTOM PICTURE‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪[Load From Cam.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [+ / Transfer File‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( > ]‪[Load From Cam.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫]‪) [+ / Transfer File‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [Load From Cam.‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CUSTOM PICTURE‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪.(١٢٢ A‬‬
‫‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ (١٤٤ A‬ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Add / File‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪) [Add / File‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [To Clip‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ(… ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [To Photo‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(…‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Add / File‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [To Clip‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [To Photo‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [To Clip‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ( ﺑﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [To Photo‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Gamma‬ﺟﺎﻣﺎ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪) [Normal 1] :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪.((١‬‬
‫]‪) [Normal 1‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ (١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ]‪) [Normal 2‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ (٢‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ]‪) [Normal 1‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ .(١‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫]‪) [Normal 4‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪:(٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Normal 3‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪) (٣‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ (ITU-R BT.709‬ﻭ]‪) [Normal 4‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ (٤‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫]‪) [Normal 2‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪) [Cine 1‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ ‪ (١‬ﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Cine 1‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Cine 2‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ ‪ (٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ]‪) [Cine 1‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ ‪ ،(١‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫]‪) [Cine 2‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ ‪:(٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺭﺍﺋﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪:[Canon Log‬‬
‫]‪ EOS) [EOS Std.‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ EOS‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪) SLR‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﺑﻀﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ٍ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫‪Cine 1‬‬
‫‪Cine 2‬‬
‫‪Normal 2/3/4‬‬
‫‪١٠٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫‪Normal 4‬‬
‫‪Normal 1‬‬
‫‪Canon Log‬‬
‫‪Normal 3‬‬
‫‪Normal 1/2‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫]‪) [Black‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﻇﻼﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Master Pedestal‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﻀﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺈﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [Master Black‬ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬‫]‪) [Red‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [Green‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪ ٥٠- :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬‫]‪) [Blue‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [Black Gamma‬ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء(‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [Gamma‬ﺟﺎﻣﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Canon Log‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ )ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫)ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ‪.(Canon‬‬
‫]‪) [Level‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ(‪ :‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﻀﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [Range‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [Point‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫‪) Black Gamma‬ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء(‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫]‪) [Low Key Satur.‬ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪) .‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪) [Off] :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ((‬
‫]‪) [Level‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺸﺒﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [Knee‬ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪١٠٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ )ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [Gamma‬ﺟﺎﻣﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Cine 1‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Cine 2‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ ‪ (٢‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Canon Log‬ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ‪ (Canon‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫]‪ EOS) [EOS Std.‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪) .‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪) [On] :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ((‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٥-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [Slope‬ﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .١٠٩‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٩٥ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Point‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [Saturation‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .١٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [Level‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ(‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [H Detail Freq.‬ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٨-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٨‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺒﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Coring‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ(‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [Level‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪ :[D-Ofst‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [D-Ofst‬ﻭ]‪ [D-Curve‬ﻭ]‪ [D-Depth‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ [D-Ofst‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠ :‬‬
‫]‪ :[D-Curve‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Level‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ( ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ .[D-Ofst‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٨‬‬
‫)ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠ :‬‬
‫]‪ :[D-Depth‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [D-Ofst‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻓﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٤‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[HV Detail Bal.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٨-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٨‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [Limit‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ]‪) [Level‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[Select‬‬
‫]‪) [Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‪:‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌّﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .720P‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .١٥‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠ :‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Knee Aperture‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [Gamma‬ﺟﺎﻣﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Cine 1‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Cine 2‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ ‪ (٢‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫)ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫]‪) [Canon Log‬ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ‪ (Canon‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ EOS) [EOS Std.‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٩‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Slope‬ﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٣‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ٠‬ﺃﻱ ﺍﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ١‬ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ٣‬ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ‪) .‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(١ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Level Depend‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ(‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Level‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Slope‬ﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٣‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪٠‬‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺍﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ١‬ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ٣‬ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ‪) .‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Offset‬ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Noise Reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ( ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ١٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪) .‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪) [Off] :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ((‬
‫]‪) [Skin Detail‬ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ(‬
‫ﺇﺑﻬﺎﺟﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻛﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Effect Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻭ]‪) [Low‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ( ﻭ]‪) [Middle‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [High‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‪) .‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪) [Off] :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ((‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٦-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .١٦‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [Hue‬ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٣١‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(١٦ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Chroma‬ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻕ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٣١‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(١٦ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Area‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪).٣١‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(١٦ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Y Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪:(Y‬‬
‫]‪) [Selective NR‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Effect Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻭ]‪) [Low‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ( ﻭ]‪[Middle‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ﻭ]‪) [High‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‪) .‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪) [Off] :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ((‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٣١‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Hue‬ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٣١‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(١٦ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Chroma‬ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻕ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٣١‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(١٦ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Area‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٣١‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(١٦ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Y Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪:(Y‬‬
‫]‪) [Color Matrix‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‪:‬‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫]‪) [Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [Phase‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [R-G‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ‪ -‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [R-B‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ‪ -‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [G-R‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ‪ -‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [G-B‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ‪ -‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [B-R‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ‪ -‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [B-G‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ‪ -‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ]‪) [Normal 1‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ (١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Normal 4‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ ،(٤‬ﻭ]‪) [Cine 1‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ ‪ (١‬ﻭ ]‪[Cine 2‬‬
‫)ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ ‪ ،(٢‬ﻭ]‪) [Canon Log‬ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ‪ (Canon‬ﻭ]‪ EOS) [EOS Std.‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Gamma‬ﺟﺎﻣﺎ(‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪) [Normal 1] :‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪((١‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٨-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .١٨‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪) R-G‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ‪ -‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻭﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪) R-B‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ‪ -‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻭﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪) G-R‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ‪ -‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪) G-B‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ‪ -‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪) B-R‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ‪ -‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪) B-G‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ‪ -‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [R Gain‬ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [G Gain‬ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [B Gain‬ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [Color Correction‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ )ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ ،(Y‬ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ )‪ A‬ﻭ‪.(B‬‬
‫]‪) [Select Area‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ]‪) [Area A‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ (A‬ﻭ]‪[Area B‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ (B‬ﻭ]‪) [Area A&B‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ .(B‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪) [Off] :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ((‬
‫]‪) [Area A Setting‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ :(A‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Phase‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ .A‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٣١‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Chroma‬ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻕ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ .A‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٣١‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(١٦ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Area‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ .A‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٣١‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(١٦ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Y Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ :(Y‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ .A‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٣١‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(١٦ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Area A Revision‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ :(A‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪.A‬‬
‫]‪) [Level‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [Phase‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٨-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .١٨‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [Area B Setting‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ :(B‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Phase‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ .B‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٣١‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Chroma‬ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻕ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ .B‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٣١‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(١٦ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Area‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ .B‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٣١‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(١٦ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Y Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ :(Y‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ .B‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٣١‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(١٦ :‬‬
‫]‪) [Area B Revision‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ :(B‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪.B‬‬
‫]‪) [Level‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [Phase‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٨-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .١٨‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Black‬ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ( ﻭ]‪[Master Pedestal‬‬
‫]‪) [Setup Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪:‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Level‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) .٥٠‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(٠± :‬‬
‫]‪) [Press‬ﺿﻐﻂ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ .٪١٠٠‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪) [Off] :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ((‬
‫]‪) [Clip At 100%‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ :(٪١٠٠‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،٪١٠٠‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪.٪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪) .‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪) [Off] :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ((‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ‪) Canon Log‬ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ‪ ،(Canon‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻩ ً‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺭﺍﺋﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻠﺰﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ‪) Canon Log‬ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ‪ (Canon‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪) LUT‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ(‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ )‪ (LUT‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻀﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫)‪ (LUT‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ‪) Canon Log‬ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ‪(Canon‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ‪) Canon Log‬ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ‪ ،(Canon‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [View Assist.‬ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( > ]‪) [View Assist.‬ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( >‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫]‪) [Custom Function‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( > ]‪) [Custom Display 1‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Custom Display 2‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ (٢‬ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ )‪.(١١١ A‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫ﻳﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Custom Function‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Custom Function‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( )‪.(١٥٤ A‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫]‪[Custom Function‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Custom Function‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Custom Function‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Custom Function‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Shockless WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺃﺧﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺻﻄﺪﺍﻡ(‬
‫]‪) [Control Dial‬ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Control Dial Dir.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Grip Ctrl Dial Dir.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[SELECT Dial Dir.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪(SELECT‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪[F. Assist. B&W‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫]‪[Scan Reverse Rec‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[Character Rec‬‬
‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)‪ .(٥٢ A‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪[Custom Display 1‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ (١‬ﻭ]‪) [Custom Display 2‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪.(١٥٠ A) (٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫]‪[Custom Display 1‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪(١‬‬
‫]‪[Custom Display 2‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪(٢‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Custom Display 1‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[Custom Display 2‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( > ]‪) [Custom Display 1‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[Custom Display 2‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪(٢‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻻﺣﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ C300‬ﺃﻭ ‪ C300 PL‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١١‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]* ‪) [Save To‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(SD‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Transfer Menu//‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ( ]* ‪) > [Save To‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SD‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[Menu+/‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ]‪[Menu+/‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Transfer Menu//‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ(‬
‫]* ‪) [Save To‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SD‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [* Load From‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Transfer Menu//‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ( > ]* ‪) [Load From‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SD‬‬
‫]‪) [//Transfer Menu‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ(‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ]‪ [Menu+/‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]* ‪) [Load From‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SD‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[Menu+/‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﺳﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﺼﻲ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ "‪ ،"PRIVATE\CAMSET‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ "‪."CAMSET3.TXT‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( > ]‪ :[Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ WEP‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [No. 1‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ (١‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫]‪) [No. 5‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ (٥‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻃﺮﺯ ‪ XF100‬ﻭ‪ XF105‬ﻭ‪ XF300‬ﻭ‪ XF305‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١١٢‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .CF‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )‪ .(١٢٨ A‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪.(١٤١ A‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ .‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪،‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) MEDIA‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١١٤‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪/$‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪(١٢٠ ،٩١ A) %‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪(٤٤ A) .‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ )‪(١٢٤ ،٩٠ A‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ )‪(٥١ A‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ )‪(١٢٥ A‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ )‪(٤٣ A‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ )‪(٩٣ A‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ )‪(١٠١ A‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )‪(٥٥ A‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺑﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،CF‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SLOT SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪) $‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫]‪) [$ Mark‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ (($‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪) %‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪[% Mark‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ* )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ((‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ((%‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ً‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) INDEX‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) INDEX‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [$ Mark‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ($‬ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [% Mark‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ .(%‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ّ ١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Ò‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Ò‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Ñ‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪ CF2‬ﺃﻭ ‪CF3‬‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨ ٩ ١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ )‪(٥٣ A‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ )‪(١١٦ A‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪(٥٨ A) ١‬‬
‫‪ # ٤‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪(٦٤ A) ١‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪/ISO‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪(٦١ A) ١‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻪ‪٢‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪/$‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪(١٢٠ ،٩١ A) %‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪(٧٣ A‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )‪(٥٥ A‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )‪(٥٥ A‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ )‪(١٠١ A‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ )‪(١٣٠ A‬‬
‫ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪(٧٦ A‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪(١٣١ A‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( > ]‪) [Metadata Display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ( > ]‪[Camera Data‬‬
‫)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( > ]‪) [Metadata Display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ( > ]‪[Date/Time‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ*‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ*‬
‫‪Ð PLAY‬‬
‫‪Ý PAUSE‬‬
‫‪Ô/Ó‬‬
‫× ‪F FWD‬‬
‫‪Ø F REV‬‬
‫‪١١٦‬‬
‫* ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ x5‬ﺃﻭ ‪ x15‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (x60‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ‪6‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء )ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء( ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ‪ 7‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Ø‬ﺃﻭ ×‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﺮﺓ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ٦٠‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Ù‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Ú‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Ú‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Ò‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‬
‫)ﺯﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ((‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎء ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ٠٫٢ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ ‪ 1280×720/24.00P‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1280×720/23.98P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (1280×720/59.94P‬ﻭ‪ ٠٫٢٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ ‪ (1280×720/50.00P‬ﻭ‪ ٠٫٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) DISP.‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ × )ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ(؛ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ً‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HD/SD SDI‬ﻭﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻱ ‪) HEADPHONE +/-‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ×‬
‫)ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪.(١٣١ A‬‬
‫• ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[¡ Audio Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪) [Audio Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪[Headphone Volume‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭﺍ ‪HEADPHONE +/-‬‬
‫)ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ(‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫‪١١٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫]‪[$ Mark‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪/($‬‬
‫]‪[% Mark‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪(%‬‬
‫]‪[Shot Mark‬‬
‫)ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ(‪/١‬‬
‫]‪[Expand Clip‬‬
‫)ﻣﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ(‬
‫]‪[Display Clip Info‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ(‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫]‪) [Add $ Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪/($‬‬
‫]‪) [Delete $ Mark‬ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪($‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪٢Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫]‪) [Add % Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪/(%‬‬
‫]‪) [Delete % Mark‬ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪(%‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ %‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪٣Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫]‪) [Copy Clip‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ(‬
‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪٢Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫]‪) [Delete Clip‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ(‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪٢Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫]‪) [Shot Mark‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ(‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫]‪) [Shot Mark 1‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪(١‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫]‪) [Shot Mark 2‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪(٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪.#‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫]‪) [Expand Clip‬ﻣﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ(‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫]‪[Delete User Memo‬‬
‫)ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻲ )‪(GPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫]‪[Add Shot Mark 1‬‬
‫)ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪/(١‬‬
‫]‪) [Del. Shot Mark 1‬ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪(١‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ " ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫]‪[Add Shot Mark 2‬‬
‫)ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪/(٢‬‬
‫]‪[Del. Shot Mark 2‬‬
‫)ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪(٢‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ #‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫]‪[Fewer Index Pics‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺃﻗﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪٤Ü‬‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫]‪) [More Index Pics‬ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪٤Ü‬‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫]‪) [Pause‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪[Set Index Picture‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Copy / File‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ( ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Shot Mark 1‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ (١‬ﻭ]‪) [Shot Mark 2‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [$ Mark‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ($‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [% Mark‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ (%‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Expand Clip‬ﻣﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ( ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻘﻄﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١٢٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CANCEL‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪ CF2‬ﺃﻭ ‪CF3‬‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Display Clip Info‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ( ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Clip Info‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ((‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CANCEL‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ً‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٥ ٦‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ )‪(١٢٤ ،٩٠ A‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ )‪(٩٣ A‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ )‪(٤٣ A‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻪ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ )‪(٥١ A‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )‪(٥٥ A‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )‪(٥٥ A‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ / $‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪(١٢٠ ،٩١ A) %‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ )‪(٩١ A‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻷﻭﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻵﺧﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Clip Info‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﺩ( ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Lens & Q‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻀﻤّﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺮﻯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Clip Info‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Clip Info‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ( ﻷﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪[/ Data 1/3‬‬
‫)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ .((١/٣‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫]‪) [/ Data 2/3‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪) [/ Data 3/3] I (٢/٣‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ I (٣/٣‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Lens & Q‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ‪ I‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Clip Info‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪ $‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪%‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( )‪ ($‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )‪ (%‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺗُﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ %‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ %‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( )‪ ($‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )‪ (%‬ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Add $ Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ($‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Add % Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ً (%‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Add $ Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ($‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Add % Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪.(٩٩ A) (%‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Add $ Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ($‬ﻭﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Add % Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪.(%‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ %‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Add $ Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ($‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Add % Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ،(%‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﺃﻭ ‪ %‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ %‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ %‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ،$‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ .$‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ،%‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪.%‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪ $‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪%‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ %‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Delete $ Mark‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ($‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Delete % Mark‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ،(%‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪ $‬ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Delete All $ Marks‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪.($‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪[Delete All $ Marks‬‬
‫)ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪($‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪ $‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪.$‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪) [Delete All $ Marks‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪($‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Copy Clip‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ‪.CF‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Copy All Clips‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Clips‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ( > ]‪[Copy All Clips‬‬
‫)ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪) [Clips‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ(‬
‫]‪) [Copy All Clips‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ(‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪$‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Copy $ Clips‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪.($‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Clips‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ( > ]‪[Copy $ Clips‬‬
‫)ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪($‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪) [Clips‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ(‬
‫]‪) [Copy $ Clips‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪($‬‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻲ ‪CF‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ )ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ .$‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ً $‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Delete Clip‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Delete All Clips‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Clips‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ( > ]‪[Delete All Clips‬‬
‫)ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ($‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪) [Clips‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ(‬
‫]‪) [Delete All Clips‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ(‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻲ )‪(GPS‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Delete User Memo‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Delete User Memo‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﻭﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻲ )‪ (GPS‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ ،(/‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Copy / File‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [/ Data 1/3‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ (١/٣‬ﻣﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CUSTOM PICTURE‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ]‪[/ Data 2/3‬‬
‫)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ (٢/٣‬ﻭ]‪) [/ Data 3/3‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪.(٣/٣‬‬
‫ﺎ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ]‪ [C8‬ﻭ]‪ [C9‬ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ " ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ #‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺗﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺗﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Shot Mark‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Shot Mark‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫]‪) [Shot Mark 1‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ (١‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Shot Mark 2‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪(٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪.#‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) INDEX‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CANCEL‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺗﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Shot Mark‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻪ ﻛﺈﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺗﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Expand Clip‬ﻣﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Expand Clip‬ﻣﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [More Index Pics‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Fewer Index Pics‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺃﻗﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) INDEX‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CANCEL‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺗﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Expand Clip‬ﻣﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ )" ﺃﻭ ‪ #‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ " ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‪ #‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ً‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ )"( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (#‬ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Add Shot Mark 1‬‬
‫)ﺇﺿﻔﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Add Shot Mark 2‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ( ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Add Shot Mark 1‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Add Shot Mark 2‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪(٢‬‬
‫)‪.(٩٩ A‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Shot Mark‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ( ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Expand Clip‬ﻣﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Add Shot Mark 1‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Add Shot Mark 2‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ ،(٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ )ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ " ﻭ‪ #‬ﻣﻌًﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٫٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Shot Mark‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ( ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Expand Clip‬ﻣﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Del. Shot Mark 1‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Del. Shot Mark 2‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ ،(٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Shot Mark‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Shot Mark‬ﻋﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Expand Clip‬ﻣﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Shot Mark‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ( ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Expand Clip‬ﻣﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set Index Picture‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪ R‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫‪١٢٦‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HD/SD SDI‬ﻭ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻭ‪ SYNC OUT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،(HDMI OUT‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﻀﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )‪.(١٣٠ A‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪I‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪L‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪24.00P‬‬
‫‪NTSC‬‬
‫‪PAL‬‬
‫‪SDI‬‬
‫‪٢ ،١HD/SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ(‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪HD‬‬
‫‪1080/24.00P‬‬
‫‪720/24.00P‬‬
‫‪1080/59.94i‬‬
‫‪1080/29.97P‬‬
‫‪1080/23.98P‬‬
‫‪/1080‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫‪720/59.94P‬‬
‫‪720/29.97P‬‬
‫‪720/23.98P‬‬
‫‪/720‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫‪1080/50.00i‬‬
‫‪1080/25.00P‬‬
‫‪/1080‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫‪720/50.00P‬‬
‫‪720/25.00P‬‬
‫‪/720‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫‪1080/60.00i‬‬
‫‪720/60.00P‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫‪٥SD‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪٣ ،٢HDMI‬‬
‫‪SYNC OUT‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪HD‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪HD‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪SD‬‬
‫‪1080/60.00i‬‬
‫‪720/60.00P‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪1080/60.00i‬‬
‫‪720/60.00P‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪480/59.94i 1080/59.94i 480/59.94P 1080/59.94i 480/59.94i 1080/59.94i‬‬
‫‪480/59.94i 720/59.94P 480/59.94P 720/59.94P 480/59.94i 720/59.94P‬‬
‫‪576/50.00i 1080/50.00i 576/50.00P 1080/50.00i 576/50.00i 1080/50.00i‬‬
‫‪576/50.00i 720/50.00P 576/50.00P 720/50.00P 576/50.00i 720/50.00P‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [¢ Video Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( > ]‪) [SDI Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ (SDI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [HD‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [SD‬ﺃﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( > ]‪) [HD Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪) (HD‬ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪) [Zebra‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ HD‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ ،SD‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ HD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،SD‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [¢ Video Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( > ]‪) [SYNC Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [HD-Y‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﻉ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[Composite‬‬
‫)ﻣﺮﻛﺐ( )ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ‪.(SD‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،HDMI OUT‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HD/SD SDI‬ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) HDMI OUT‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪.(HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ .(١٢٧ A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،SYNC OUT‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪.(٨٤ A‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺻﻴﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪SYNC OUT‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪BNC‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪HD/SD SDI‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪BNC‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ(‬
‫‪) SDI IN‬ﺩﺧﻞ ‪(SDI‬‬
‫‪) VIDEO IN‬ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺃﻭ ‪COMPONENT IN‬‬
‫)ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ( )‪(Y‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫)ﺩﺧﻞ ‪(HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HD/SD SDI‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HD/SD SDI‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ HD‬ﺃﻭ ‪.*SD‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [¢ Video Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫]‪) [SDI Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪(SDI‬‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪.24.00P‬‬
‫]‪[HD‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [SDI Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪.(SDI‬‬
‫]‪) [¢ Video Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( > ]‪) [SDI Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪(SDI‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[SD‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪.(١٣٠ A) SD‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﻀﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )‪.(١٣٠ A‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ HD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،*SD‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪TM‬‬
‫* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪.24.00P‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ‪.DVI‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﻀﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )‪.(١٣٠ A‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪.(١٣٠ A) SD‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪SYNC OUT‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ SYNC OUT‬ﻛﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﺼﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ‪ SD‬ﺗﻢ ﺧﻔﻀﻬﺎ*‪.‬‬
‫* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪.24.00P‬‬
‫]‪) [¢ Video Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫]‪) [SYNC Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [Composite‬ﻣﺮﻛﺐ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [SYNC Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪.(SYNC‬‬
‫]‪) [¢ Video Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( > ]‪) [SYNC Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪(SYNC‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [HD-Y‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Composite‬ﻣﺮﻛﺐ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [HD-Y‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﺼﻮﻉ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Composite‬‬
‫)ﻣﺮﻛﺐ( )ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ‪ ،(SD‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ،٤:٣‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Video ID-1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.WSS‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﻀﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )‪.(١٣٠ A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) HD‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ (١٦:٩‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪SD‬‬
‫)ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ،(٤:٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [SD Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪.(SD‬‬
‫]‪) [¢ Video Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫]‪) [SD Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪(SD‬‬
‫]‪) [Letterbox‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [¢ Video Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( > ]‪) [SD Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪(SD‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Squeeze‬ﺿﻐﻂ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪.١٦:٩‬‬
‫]‪) [Letterbox‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٦:٩‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Side Crop‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )‪(١٦:٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[Squeeze‬‬
‫)ﺿﻐﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[Letterbox‬‬
‫)ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HD/SD SDI‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .SYNC OUT‬ﻭﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HD‬ﻭ‪ .SD‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [HD Onscreen Disp.‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ (HD‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [SD Onscreen Disp.‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.(SD‬‬
‫]‪) [¢ Video Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( > ]‪) [HD Onscreen Disp.‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ (HD‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [SD Onscreen Disp.‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪(SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[Side Crop‬‬
‫)ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ(‬
‫]‪) [¢ Video Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫]‪) [HD Onscreen Disp.‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪(HD‬‬
‫]‪) [SD Onscreen Disp.‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪(SD‬‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ T‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( >‬
‫]‪) [Custom Display 2‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪) [Output Display] > (٢‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ((‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ SD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [¢ Video Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( > ]‪[SD Output‬‬
‫)ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ (SD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Side Crop‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Onscreen Display‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( )‪ ،(٩٩ A‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ HD‬ﻭ‪.(SD‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HD/SD SDI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ × )ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ × )ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ .HD/SD SDI‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [¢ Video Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( > ]‪) [SDI Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ (SDI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [HD‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،(١٢٩ A) [SD‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ × )ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Channel‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪) [Audio Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( >‬
‫]‪) [Channel‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ(‬
‫]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [Audio Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [Channel‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ(‬
‫]‪) [CH1/CH2‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪/١‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪(٢‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫]‪) [CH1/CH2‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪/١‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ :(٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪) CH1‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪) CH2‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [CH1/CH1‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪/١‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ :(١‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪) CH1‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [CH2/CH2‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪/٢‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ :(٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪) CH2‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪) CH1‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ (١‬ﻭ‪) CH2‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ (٢‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [All/All‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Audio Output CH‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( )‪ ،(٩٩ A‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ Canon XF Utilities‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫‪ :Canon XF Utility 1‬ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻓﺤﺼﻪ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻲ )‪ :(NLE‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) CF‬ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ .NLE‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪) Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access‬ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﺃﻭ ‪(Mac OS‬‬‫ ‪) Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro‬ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪(Mac OS‬‬‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺰﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪ (١٣٨ A‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫‪،١Windows‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫‪SP3‬‬
‫‪XP‬‬
‫‪SP2 ،٢Windows Vista‬‬
‫‪ ،٢Windows 7‬ﻣﻊ ‪ SP1‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻧﻪ‬
‫‪ Mac OS X‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١٠٫٥‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٠٫٦‬ﺃﻭ ‪١٠٫٧‬‬
‫‪) Intel® Core‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪،Intel® Core 2 Duo‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٢٫٦٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(؛ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪SSE2‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ®‪) Intel‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬
‫‪ ،Intel® Core 2 Duo‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٢٫٦٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫)‪(RAM‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٦٤‬ﺑﺖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ٨٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٠٢٤ × ٧٦٨‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ١٦‬ﺑﺖ )ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ ١٠٢٤ × ٧٦٨‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﺪﻗﺔ‪ ٣٢٠٠٠ ،‬ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﻥ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻭ‪ ٦٤‬ﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫‪) Media Composer 4.05 / 5.0 / 5.5‬ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪(Mac OS‬‬
‫‪) NewsCutter 8.0.5 / 9.0 / 9.5‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫‪ Final Cut Pro 6.0.6 / 7.0.0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪7.0.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ Canon XF Utility‬ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪(Windows‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ .Canon XF Utility‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻟـ ‪ Canon XF Utilities‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Canon XF Utilities‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ :Windows Vista‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪) AutoPlay‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Run SETUP.EXE‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.(SETUP.EXE‬‬‫ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ‪ :Windows XP‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ]‪) [Computer‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( )‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪(Windows Vista‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪) [MyComputer‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( )‪ ،(Windows XP‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Asia‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Oceania‬ﺟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﺉ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ]‪) [Easy Installation‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﻬﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٧‬‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [Install‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [Yes‬ﻧﻌﻢ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Yes‬ﻧﻌﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [Installation has completed successfully.‬ﺗﻤﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) All Programs‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( < ‪) Canon Utilities‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( < ‪< Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫‪) Uninstall Canon XF Utility‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.(Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [Yes‬ﻧﻌﻢ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [The software has been successfully uninstalled‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ‪) Programs and Features‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ(* )‪ (Windows Vista/Windows 7‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) Add or Remove Programs‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( )‪.(Windows XP‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Uninstall‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Uninstall/Change‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ( )‪ (Windows Vista/Windows 7‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) Change/Remove‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ( )‪.(Windows XP‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ‪) Add or Remove Programs‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫* ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ‪Canon XF MPEG2‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ‪) Programs and Features‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ(* )‪ (Windows Vista/Windows 7‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) Add or Remove Programs‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( )‪.(Windows XP‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Canon XF MPEG2 Decoder‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ‪.(Canon XF MPEG2‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Uninstall‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Uninstall/Change‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ( )‪ (Windows Vista/Windows 7‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) Change/Remove‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ( )‪.(Windows XP‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ‪) Add or Remove Programs‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫* ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ‪) All Programs‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( < ‪) Canon Utilities‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( < ‪Canon XF Plugin‬‬
‫‪Uninstall Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access Instruction Manual < for Avid Media Access‬‬
‫)ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪.(Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [Yes‬ﻧﻌﻢ( ﺛﻢ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪) Canon XF Utility‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪(Mac OS‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Canon XF Utilities‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.MasterInstaller‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ CanonXFxxM‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪) DEVICES‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ "‪ "xx‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Mac OS X‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ v10.5‬ﺃﻭ ‪ :10.6‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.MasterInstaller‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٥‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [Install‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٦‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [Agree‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Agree‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ]‪) [Easy Installation‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﻬﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٨‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
.‫[ )ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬Next] ‫ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬٨
١٣٧
.(.‫[ )ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬Installation has finished.] ‫ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬،‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
.‫[ )ﺇﻧﻬﺎء( ﺛﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬Finish] ‫ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬٩
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
.(‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬Canon ‫ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬Canon Utilities ‫ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ‬،(‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬Applications ‫ ﻣﻦ‬١
.(‫ )ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‬Trash ‫ ﻭﺇﻓﻼﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬Canon XF Utility ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ‬٢
Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
.(‫ )ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‬Trash ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺇﻓﻼﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
/Library/Application Support/ProApps/MIO/RAD/Plugins/CanonXF.RADPlug
Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
.(‫ )ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‬Trash ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺇﻓﻼﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
/Library/Application Support/Avid/AVX2_Plug-ins/AMA/MVP_CanonXF.avx
Canon XF MPEG2 ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ‬
.(‫ )ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‬Trash ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺇﻓﻼﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
/Library/QuickTime/XFMpeg2Dec.component
Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
.(‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬Canon ‫ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬Canon Utilities ‫ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ‬،(‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬Applications ‫ ﻣﻦ‬١
.(‫ )ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‬Trash ‫ ﻭﺇﻓﻼﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ‬٢
Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
.(‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬Canon ‫ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬Canon Utilities ‫ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ‬،(‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬Applications ‫ ﻣﻦ‬١
.(‫ )ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‬Trash ‫ ﻭﺇﻓﻼﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ‬٢
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ )ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ (PDF‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ®‪.Adobe® Reader‬‬
‫‪١٣٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪:Windows‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) All Programs‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( < ‪) Canon Utilities‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( < ‪< Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫‪) Canon XF Utility Instruction Manual‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪.(Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪:Mac OS‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ‪) Applications‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ‪) Canon Utilities‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( < ‪Manual < Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫)ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪.(Canon XF Utility‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪.PDF‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Canon XF Utility‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Help‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ( < ]‪[View instruction manual‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪) Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪:(Windows‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) All Programs‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( < ‪) Canon Utilities‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( < ‪Canon XF Plugin‬‬
‫‪Uninstall Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access Instruction Manual < for Avid Media Access‬‬
‫)ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪.(Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪) Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪:(Mac OS‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ‪) Applications‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ‪) Canon Utilities‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( < ‪< Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro‬‬
‫‪) Manual‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪.(Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪.PDF‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪) Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪:(Mac OS‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ‪) Applications‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ‪) Canon Utilities‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( < ‪Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media‬‬
‫‪) Manual < Access‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪.(Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪.PDF‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪ ١٠٨٠ × ١٩٢٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ*‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ ١٠٨٠ × ١٩٢٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٠٨٠ × ١٤٤٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ١٠٨٠ × ١٩٢٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ ٧٢٠ × ١٢٨٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٢٠ × ١٢٨٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦٧٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) CAMERA‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪ .(١٠١ A‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ( )‪.(٩٩ A‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• * ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪[Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫)‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ( > ]‪) [Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ((‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) MEDIA‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Photo‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ( ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ( )‪.(٩٩ A‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Ò‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• * ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Ñ‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١٤٠‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) LOCK‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) LOCK‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ( ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Custom Function‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( > ]‪[Scan Reverse Rec‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪١٤١‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) MEDIA‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) INDEX‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Photo Index‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) INDEX‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Ò‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ Ú/Ù‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ً‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) DISP.‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ﻹﺧﻔﺎء‪/‬ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Ñ‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١٤٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ )‪.(١٤١ A‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻀﻤ ًﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ( )‪.(١٤١ A‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻀﻤ ًﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Delete All Photos‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Delete All Photos‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪) [Delete All Photos‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ )‪.(١٤١ A‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Protect‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Unprotect‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ i‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻀﻤ ًﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ( )‪.(١٤١ A‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Protect‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Unprotect‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ i‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٤‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ )‪.(١٤١ A‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Copy / File‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [/ Data 1/3‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ (١/٣‬ﻣﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CUSTOM PICTURE‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ]‪[/ Data 2/3‬‬
‫)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ (٢/٣‬ﻭ]‪) [/ Data 3/3‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪.(٣/٣‬‬
‫ﺎ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ( )‪.(١٤١ A‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Copy / File‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [/ Data 1/3‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ (١/٣‬ﻣﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) CUSTOM PICTURE‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ]‪[/ Data 2/3‬‬
‫)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ (٢/٣‬ﻭ]‪) [/ Data 3/3‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪.(٣/٣‬‬
‫ﺎ‪/‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ]‪ [C8‬ﻭ]‪ [C9‬ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠١٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٠٠‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٩٩٨‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫]‪) [Photo Numbering‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ 101-0107‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ "‪ "DCIM\101CANON‬ﻛﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫"‪."IMG_0107.jpg‬‬
‫]‪) [Continu.‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ]‪) [Photo Numbering‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Photo Numbering‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫]‪) [RESET‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪:‬‬
‫]‪) [Continu.‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠١٠١‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Continu.‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ( ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺭﻗﻤًﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Continu.‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١٤٦‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١٤٧‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )‪ .(٢٩ A‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [¢ Video Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [¤ TC/UB Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪(TC/UB‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [ My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪/ISO) [ISO/Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‬
‫‪) [Iris] #‬ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ(‬
‫]‪) [Shutter‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‬
‫‪١٤٧ A‬‬
‫‪١٤٨ A‬‬
‫‪١٤٨ A‬‬
‫‪١٤٩ A‬‬
‫‪١٥١ A‬‬
‫‪١٥٢ A‬‬
‫‪١٥٥ A‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫]‪ [ISO‬ﻭ]‪) [Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‬
‫]‪) [ISO Increment‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫]‪ ١) [1 stop‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ( ﻭ]‪ ١/٣) [1/3 stop‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫]‪) [Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‬
‫]‪) [Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭ]‪) [Fine‬ﺩﻗﻴﻖ(‬
‫]‪) [Iris Increment‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ(‬
‫]‪ ١/٢) [1/2 stop‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ( ﻭ]‪ ١/٣) [1/3 stop‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ( ﻭ]‪) [Fine‬ﺩﻗﻴﻖ(‬
‫]‪) [Zoom-Iris Correct.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻗﺰﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫]‪) [Mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ(‬
‫]‪) [Speed‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ( ﻭ]‪) [Angle‬ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ( ﻭ]‪) [Clear Scan‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ( ﻭ]‪[Slow‬‬
‫)ﺑﻄﻲء( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫]‪) [Shutter Increment‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ]‪ ١/٣) [1/3 stop‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ( ﻭ]‪ ٤/١) [1/4 stop‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [/ CINEMA Locked‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺆﻣّﻦ(‬
‫]‪) [ABB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫]‪) [Color Bars‬ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻭ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [Type‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ(‬
‫]‪ [SMPTE‬ﻭ]‪ [EBU‬ﻭ]‪[ARIB‬‬
‫‪) [Periph. Illum. Corr.] #‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [¡ Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Audio Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪١٤٨‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫]‪) [XLR Rec Channel‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪(XLR‬‬
‫]‪) [CH1‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ (١‬ﻭ]‪) [CH1/CH2‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪/١‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(٢‬‬
‫]‪) [XLR1 Mic Trimming‬ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪(XLR1‬‬
‫]‪ ١٢+) [+12 dB‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ( ﻭ]‪ ٦+) [+6 dB‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪ ٠) [0 dB‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ( ﻭ]‪ ٦-) [-6 dB‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ( ﻭ]‪[-12 dB‬‬
‫)‪ ١٢-‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [XLR2 Mic Trimming‬ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪(XLR2‬‬
‫]‪) [XLR1 Mic Att.‬ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪(XLR1‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [XLR2 Mic Att.‬ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪(XLR2‬‬
‫]‪) [Audio Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪،٨٢‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫]‪) [XLR ALC Link‬ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪XLR‬‬
‫‪(ALC‬‬
‫]‪) [Linked‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Separated‬ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [Limiter‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [1 kHz Tone‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫]‪ ١٢-) [-12 dB‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ( ﻭ]‪ ١٨-) [-18 dB‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪ ٢٠-) [-20 dB‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [MIC Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ(‬
‫]‪) [Automatic‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻭ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [MIC Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٥٠) ٩٩‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [MIC Att.‬ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫]‪) [Channel‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ(‬
‫]‪) [CH1/CH2‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪/١‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ (٢‬ﻭ]‪[CH1/CH1‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪/١‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ (١‬ﻭ]‪) [CH2/CH2‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪/٢‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(٢‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [All/All‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪*Ü‬‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫]‪[Headphone Volume‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ(‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٨) ١٥‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪*Ü‬‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [¢ Video Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫]‪) [SDI Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪(SDI‬‬
‫]‪ [HD‬ﻭ]‪ *[SD‬ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫]‪) [SYNC Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ(‬
‫]‪ [HD-Y‬ﻭ]‪ [HD Sync‬ﻭ]‪) [Blk Burst‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(* ﻭ]‪) [Composite‬ﻣﺮﻛﺐ(* ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪،٧٩‬‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫]‪) [HD Onscreen Disp.‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪(HD‬‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [SD Onscreen Disp.‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪*(SD‬‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [SD Output‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪*(SD‬‬
‫]‪) [Squeeze‬ﺿﻐﻂ( ﻭ]‪) [Letterbox‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Side Crop‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ(‬
‫* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪.24.00P‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [£ LCD/VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [LCD Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٠±) ٩٩‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٠±) ٩٩‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Color‬ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ -٢٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٠±) ٢٠‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٢) ٤‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Backlight‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭ]‪) [Bright‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٠±) ٩٩‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٠±) ٩٩‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Color‬ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ -٢٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٠±) ٢٠‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٢) ٤‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Backlight‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫]‪) [Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭ]‪) [Bright‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪/LCD) [LCD/VF B&W‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫]‪) [LCD/VF Simul.‬ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫]‪) [View Assist.‬ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫]‪) [Peaking‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Peaking 1‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ‪ (١‬ﻭ]‪) [Peaking 2‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ‪(٢‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [White‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ( ﻭ]‪) [Red‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ( ﻭ]‪) [Yellow‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Blue‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫]‪) [Peaking 1‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ‪(١‬‬
‫]‪) [Color‬ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫]‪) [Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٨) ١٥‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Frequency‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٢) ٤‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Color‬ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫]‪) [White‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ( ﻭ]‪) [Red‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ( ﻭ]‪) [Yellow‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Blue‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٥) ١٥‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Frequency‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١) ٤‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫]‪) [Zebra 1‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪(١‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Zebra 2‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪(٢‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Zebra 1&2‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪١‬ﻭ‪(٢‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Zebra 1 Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪(١‬‬
‫]‪،[٪٥± ٨٥] ،[٪٥± ٨٠] ،[٪٥± ٧٥] ،[٪٥± ٧٠‬‬
‫]‪[٪٥± ٩٥] ،[٪٥± ٩٠‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Zebra 2 Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪(٢‬‬
‫]‪[٪١٠٠] ،[٪٩٥] ،[٪٩٠] ،[٪٨٥] ،[٪٨٠] ،[٪٧٥] ،[٪٧٠‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Center‬ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻂ(‬
‫]‪) [White‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ( ﻭ]‪) [Gray‬ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Horizontal‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ(‬
‫]‪) [White‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ( ﻭ]‪) [Gray‬ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Grid‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [White‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ( ﻭ]‪) [Gray‬ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Safety Zone‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [White‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ( ﻭ]‪) [Gray‬ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Safety Zone Area‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ(‬
‫]‪[٪٩٥] ،[٪٩٢٫٥] ،[٪٩٠] ،[٪٨٠‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Aspect Marker‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ(‬
‫]‪) [White‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ( ﻭ]‪) [Gray‬ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Aspect Ratio‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ(‬
‫]‪،[١٫٧٥:١] ،[١٫٦٦:١] ،[١٤:٩] ،[١٣:٩] ،[٤:٣‬‬
‫]‪[٢٫٣٥:١] ،[١٫٨٥:١‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫–‬
‫‪*Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Peaking 2‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ‪(٢‬‬
‫]‪) [Zebra‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫]‪) [HD Output‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪(HD‬‬
‫]‪) [Markers‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫]‪) [Audio Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١٤٩‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Custom Display 1‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪(١‬‬
‫‪١٥٠‬‬
‫]‪) [Custom Display 2‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪(٢‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Custom Picture‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) [Focal Length] #‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [ND Filter‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪(ND‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Key Lock‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪) [Iris] #‬ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪/ISO) [ISO/Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Shutter‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Peaking‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Magnification‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [View Assist.‬ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Remaining Battery‬ﺷﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ(‬
‫]‪) [Warning‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ( ﻭ]‪) [Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Remaining Rec Time‬ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ(‬
‫]‪) [Warning‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ( ﻭ]‪) [Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Rec Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪[Genlock‬‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Time Code‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Interval Counter‬ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [SD Card Status‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) [Warning] (SD‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ( ﻭ]‪) [Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [Metadata Display‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ(‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫]‪) [Bit Rate/Resolution‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Character Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ( ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Output Display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [SDI Rec Command‬ﺃﻣﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪(SDI‬‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [User Memo‬ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [User Bit‬ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Audio Output CH‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [Audio Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫]‪) [Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻭ]‪) [Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫–‬
‫‪*Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Camera Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫–‬
‫‪*Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Audio Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Custom Display 1‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪(١‬‬
‫]‪) [Custom Picture‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪ (/‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪) [Focal Length] #‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻷﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [ND Filter‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ :(ND‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Key Lock‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‪ (C‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) [Iris] #‬ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪/ISO) [ISO/Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Shutter‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Peaking‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ )‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (K‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Magnification‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )^( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [View Assist.‬ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‬
‫( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥١‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Custom Display 2‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪(٢‬‬
‫]‪) [Remaining Battery‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ(‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Warning‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ(‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Remaining Rec Time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Warning‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ(‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Rec Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )]‪) [STBY‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[Genlock‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء )‪ (U‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Time Code‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Interval Counter‬ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [SD Card Status‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ :(SD‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫]‪) [Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Warning‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ(‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Bit Rate/Resolution‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Character Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ )‪ (S‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Output Display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ )‪ (T‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [SDI Rec Command‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ :(SDI‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ SDI‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( >‬
‫]‪) [SDI Rec Command‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ (SDI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [User Memo‬ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪ (Q‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [User Bit‬ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Audio Output CH‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Audio Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ‪) ،‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[On‬‬
‫( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Metadata Display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ(‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [¤ TC/UB Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) (TC/UB‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Time Code‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫]‪) [Mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ(‬
‫]‪) [Preset‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ( ﻭ]‪) [Regen.‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء(‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫]‪) [Run‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [Rec Run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Free Run‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ(‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫]‪* [DF/NDF‬‬
‫]‪ [DF‬ﻭ]‪[NDF‬‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫]‪) [Setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫]‪) [Set‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻭ]‪) [Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫]‪) [TC In/Out‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ]‪) [In‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﻭ]‪) [Out‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ(‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [User Bit‬ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‬
‫‪١٥٢‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫]‪) [Rec Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [Internal‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ( ﻭ]‪) [External‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‬
‫]‪) [Output Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ(‬
‫]‪) [Fixed‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ( ﻭ]‪) [Pulldown‬ﻣﻨﺴﺪﻝ(‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫]‪) [Type‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ(‬
‫]‪) [Setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭ]‪) [Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻭ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [NDF‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪ [24.00P‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬‫ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪ [NTSC/PAL‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[PAL‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪ [NTSC/PAL‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [NTSC‬ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪23.98P‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [¤ User Bit Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Output Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ(‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫]‪) [Fixed‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ( ﻭ]‪) [Pulldown‬ﻣﻨﺴﺪﻝ(‬
‫* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‬
‫]‪[Transfer Menu//‬‬
‫)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪(//‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫]‪) [All Settings‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [Camera Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻭ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫]‪) [Assignable Buttons‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‬
‫]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻭ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫]*‪) [Save To‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SD‬‬
‫])‪) [WFM (LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١((LCD‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻭ]‪) [Menu+/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪(/+‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]* ‪) [Load From‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) [Menu] (SD‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻭ]‪) [Menu+/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪(/+‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Date Format‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫]‪) [YMD‬ﺱ ﺵ ﻱ( ﻭ]‪) [YMD/24H‬ﺱ ﺵ ﻱ‪ ٢٤/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [MDY‬ﺵ ﻱ ﺱ( ﻭ]‪) [MDY/24H‬ﺵ ﻱ ﺱ‪ ٢٤/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [DMY‬ﻱ ﺵ ﺱ( ﻭ]‪) [DMY/24H‬ﻱ ﺵ ﺱ‪ ٢٤/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‪٢‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫]‪) [WFM‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ( ﻭ]‪) [VS‬ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Edge Mon.‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [WFM‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ( ﻭ]‪) [VS‬ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫–‬
‫‪١Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Line‬ﺍﻟﺨﻂ( ﻭ]‪) [Line+Spot‬ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‪+‬ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Field‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ( ﻭ]‪) [RGB‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪[YPbPr‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١Ü‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [UTC-05:00 New York‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪٠٥:٠٠-‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﻮﻳﻮﺭﻙ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[UTC+01:00 Central Europe‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ٠١:٠٠+‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ(‪٢‬‬
‫]‪) [Waveform Monitor‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‬
‫]‪) [Vectorscope‬ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‬
‫]‪) [Edge Monitor‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‬
‫]! ‪) [Language‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [Assign Button‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Time Zone‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [Clock Set‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻭ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫]‪ [١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪[١٥‬‬
‫]‪ [1x‬ﻭ]‪[2x‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Spot‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ( ﻭ]‪) [Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١Ü‬‬
‫]‪ [1x‬ﻭ]‪[5x‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢) ١٥‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Deutsch‬ﺍﻷﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻭ]‪) [English‬ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Español‬ﺍﻹﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻭ]‪) [Français‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Italiano‬ﺍﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻭ]‪) [Polski‬ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ( ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻭ]‬
‫[‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺷﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ‪٣‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪١١١‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫‪١Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Type 1‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ (١‬ﻭ]‪) [Type 2‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(٢‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪١Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Tally Lamp‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Media Access LED‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LED‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Genlock Adjust.‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء(‬
‫]‪ [١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪[٩‬‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٢٣-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(000) ١٠٢٣+‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١Ü‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪٢[PAL‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١Ü‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫]‪) [Relay Rec‬ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫]‪) [Double Slot Rec‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫]‪[24.00P‬‬
‫]‪[NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫]‪[NTSC‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Bit Rate/Resolution‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫]‪ ٥٠) [50 Mbps 1920x1080‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ (١٠٨٠ × ١٩٢٠‬ﻭ]‪[50 Mbps 1280x720‬‬
‫)‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪(٧٢٠×١٢٨٠‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪ ٣٥) [35 Mbps 1920x1080‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ (١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬ﻭ]‪[35 Mbps 1280x720‬‬
‫)‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪(٧٢٠×١٢٨٠‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪ ٢٥) [25 Mbps 1440x1080‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪(١٠٨٠×١٤٤٠‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪ [NTSC/PAL‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪:[NTSC‬‬
‫]‪ [59.94i‬ﻭ]‪ [59.94P‬ﻭ]‪ [29.97P‬ﻭ]‪[23.98P‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪ [NTSC/PAL‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪:[PAL‬‬
‫]‪ [50.00i‬ﻭ]‪ [50.00P‬ﻭ]‪[25.00P‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫]‪) [Special Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ(‬
‫]‪) [Interval Rec‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Frame Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻭ]‪[Pre Rec‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ( ﻭ]‪[Slow & Fast Motion‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫]‪) [Interval Rec‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ( ]‪) [Interval‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ(‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( ﻭ]‪[15 sec‬‬
‫]‪ ١) [1 sec‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ِ ١٠) [10 sec‬‬
‫)‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻭ]‪ ٢٠) [20 sec‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪ ٣٠) [30 sec‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻭ]‪ ٤٠) [40 sec‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻭ]‪[50 sec‬‬
‫)‪ ٥٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪ ١) [1 min‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ ١٠) [10 min‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Rec Frames‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪ [24.00P‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [23.98P‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪ [29.97P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪:[59.94i‬‬
‫‪٩ ،٦ ،٣ ،١‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪ [25.00P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [50.00i‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [50.00P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪:[59.94P‬‬
‫‪١٢ ،٦ ،٢‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Frame Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫]‪) [Rec Frames‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪ [24.00P‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [23.98P‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪ [29.97P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪:[59.94i‬‬
‫‪٩ ،٦ ،٣ ،١‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪ [25.00P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [50.00i‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [50.00P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪:[59.94P‬‬
‫‪١٢ ،٦ ،٢‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪[Slow & Fast Motion‬‬
‫)ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [S&F Frame Rate‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫]‪) [Clips‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ(‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪ [24.00P‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫]‪ [NTSC/PAL‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪:[NTSC‬‬
‫)ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ( )‪ (٣٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ً‬
‫]‪) [Bit Rate/Resolution‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٠٨٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫)ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ( )‪ (٣٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٦٠‬‬
‫ً‬
‫]‪) [Bit Rate/Resolution‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٧٢٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪ [NTSC/PAL‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪:[PAL‬‬
‫)ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ( )‪ (٢٥‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٢٥‬‬
‫ً‬
‫]‪) [Bit Rate/Resolution‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٠٨٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫)ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ( )‪ (٢٥‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ً‬
‫]‪) [Bit Rate/Resolution‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٧٢٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫]‪) [Title Prefix‬ﺑﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﺣﺮﻓﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ]‪ [A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [Z‬ﻭﻣﻦ ]‪ [٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪([AA]) [٩‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Number setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬
‫]‪) [Set‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻭ]‪) [Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Delete Last Clip‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ( ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻭ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻭ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫–‬
‫‪٤Ü‬‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫]‪) [Copy $ Clips‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪) [Cancel] ($‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻭ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫–‬
‫‪٥Ü‬‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫]‪) [Delete All Clips‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ( ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻭ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫–‬
‫‪٤Ü‬‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٥Ü‬‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫]‪) [Copy All Clips‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ(‬
‫]‪) [Delete All $ Marks‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪($‬‬
‫]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻭ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫]‪) [Rec Review‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [Entire Clip‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ(‪[Last 4 sec] ،‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫)ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫]‪) [Remote‬ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ( ﻭ]‪) [SD Card‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SD‬‬
‫]‪) [Set Metadata‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ(‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬
‫]‪) [User Memo‬ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫]‪) [Country Code‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Z‬ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩‬ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ )‪(+‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ )‪ (-‬ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ )‪ (:‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Organization‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [User Code‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪١٥٣‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [SDI Rec Command‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪(SDI‬‬
‫‪١٥٤‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Photo Numbering‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ]‪) [Continu.‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١Ü‬‬
‫‪١٤٥‬‬
‫]‪) [Delete All Photos‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻭ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫–‬
‫‪٦Ü‬‬
‫‪١٤٣‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١٠٤‬‬
‫]‪) [Add /File‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [Custom Function‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫]‪) [To Clip‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [To Photo‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ( ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [Shockless WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺻﻄﺪﺍﻡ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [Control Dial‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬
‫‪) [Iris]#‬ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ( ﻭ]‪/ISO) [ISO/Gain‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪/ISO) [ISO/Gain] $‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [Control Dial Dir.‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬
‫]‪) [Reverse‬ﻋﻜﺴﻲ( ﻭ]‪) [Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫]‪) [Grip Ctrl Dial Dir.‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ(‬
‫]‪) [Reverse‬ﻋﻜﺴﻲ( ﻭ]‪) [Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫]‪) [SELECT Dial Dir.‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺹ ]‪) [Reverse‬ﻋﻜﺴﻲ( ﻭ]‪) [Normal‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪(SELECT‬‬
‫]‪) [F. Assist. B&W‬ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫]‪) [Both‬ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ( ﻭ]‪) [Magnify‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ( ﻭ]‪[Peaking‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [Scan Reverse Rec‬ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ(‬
‫]‪) [Both‬ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ( ﻭ]‪) [Vertical‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ( ﻭ]‪[Horizontal‬‬
‫)ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [Character Rec‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ( ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [Reset Hour Meter‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ(‬
‫]‪Remote‬‬
‫‪٧[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫]‪) [Set Up New‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫]‪) [Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬
‫]‪) [Edit‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬
‫]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻭ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ - WFT-E6‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪"Canon‬‬
‫)ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.(PDF‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫]‪) [Camera Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫]‪) [Initialize Media‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‬
‫]‪[CF A‬‬
‫]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻭ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫]‪) [Complete‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ( ﻭ]‪) [Quick‬ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ(‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪[CF B‬‬
‫]‪) [SD Card‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SD‬‬
‫]‪) [Firmware‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺼﺮ ]‪) [Assign Button‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ(‪) [(NONE)] :‬ﺑﻼ( ﻭ]‪) [Peaking‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ( ﻭ]‪) [Zebra‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ( ﻭ ])‪[WFM (LCD‬‬
‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ((LCD‬ﻭ]‪) [Edge Monitor‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ( ﻭ]‪) [Magnification‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ( ﻭ]‪) [Color Bars‬ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ﻭ]‪) [Markers‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻭ]‪) [LCD Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﻭ]‪) [VF Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻭ]‪) [LCD/VF B&W‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Onscreen Display‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻭ]‪) [Add Shot Mark 1‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ (١‬ﻭ]‪) [Add Shot Mark 2‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ (٢‬ﻭ]‪[Add $ Mark‬‬
‫)ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ($‬ﻭ]‪) [Add % Mark‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ (%‬ﻭ]‪) [Time Code‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻭ]‪) [Time Code Hold‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻭ]‪[Headphone +‬‬
‫)ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪ (+‬ﻭ]‪) [Headphone -‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪ (-‬ﻭ]‪) [Audio Output CH‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻭ]‪) [Audio Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻭ]‪) [Photo‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ( ﻭ]‪) [FUNC. Shutter‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ﻭ]‪) [FUNC. ISO/Gain‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪/ISO‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ( ﻭ]‪) [FUNC. WB‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( ﻭ]‪) [Initialize Media‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ( ﻭ])‪) [User Setting (NONE‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺑﻼ((‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪) [Magnification] :[١] .‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ( ﻭ]‪) [Peaking] :[٢‬ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ( ﻭ]‪) [Zebra] :[٣‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ( ﻭ]‪WFM] :[٤‬‬
‫)‪) [(LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ((LCD‬ﻭ]‪) [Headphone +] :[٥‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪ (+‬ﻭ]‪) [Headphone -] :[٦‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪ (-‬ﻭ]‪) [Magnification] :[٧‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [WFM (LCD)] :[٨‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ((LCD‬ﻭ]‪) [Edge Monitor] :[٩‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ( ﻭﻣﻦ ]‪ [١٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪)) [(NONE)] :[١٥‬ﺑﻼ((‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [$ Mark‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ($‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ( ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WFT-E6‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪ :‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [All Settings‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪ :‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Camera Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ :‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ )‪ #‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭ]‪) [~ Camera Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Assignable Buttons‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪ :‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Tally Lamp‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Media Access LED‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LED‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Genlock Adjust.‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .٠‬ﻭﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻔﺔ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪) ±0.4 H‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٢٣-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .(١٠٢٣‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٠٠٠-‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،١٠-‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Clips‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ(‬
‫]‪) [Title Prefix‬ﺑﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺣﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Number Setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻜﻮًﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Number setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Title Prefix‬ﺑﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻜﻮ ًﻧﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[0001‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Delete Last Clip‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ(‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﺬ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﻫﻮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ ISO-3166-1‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Country Code‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ(‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ّ‬
‫]‪) [Organization‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ .SMPTE‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ]‪.[0000‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺮﻛﻪ ً‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [Organization‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[0000‬‬
‫]‪) [User Code‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ّ‬
‫]‪) [SDI Rec Command‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ :(SDI‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،HD/SD SDI‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺒﺪء ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Reset Hour Meter‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ(‪ :‬ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ "ﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ" – ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Firmware‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫]‪My Menu‬‬
‫[ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [Edit‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻭ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫]‪) [Move‬ﻧﻘﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻭ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫]‪) [Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‬
‫]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻭ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫]‪) [Reset All‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻭ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪١٥٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ -‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) STATUS‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ]‪) [Camera‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ]‪) [Assign Button 1/2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪ (١/٢‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪SELECT‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) STATUS‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﺃﻭ ‪CUSTOM PICTURE‬‬
‫•‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪/ISO‬ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ‪ ١‬ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ ١‬ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪.١‬‬
‫]‪) [Camera‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪٢Ü‬‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
‫]‪) [Audio‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١٥٨‬‬
‫]‪) [Media‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١٥٨‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
‫]‪) [Assign Button 1/2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،(٢/١‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Assign Button 2/2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪،(٢/٢‬‬
‫]‪) [VIDEO‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Metadata 1/2‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪،(٢/١‬‬
‫]‪) [Metadata 2/2‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪(٢/٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Battery/Hour Meter‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [/ Data 1/3‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪،(١/٣‬‬
‫]‪) [/Data 2/3‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪،(٢/٣‬‬
‫]‪) [/ Data 3/3‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪١٦٠‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪،١٦٠‬‬
‫‪١٦١‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣(٣/٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Remote 1/4‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫]‪٤[Wi-Fi Remote 4/4‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WFT-E6‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ "ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ - WFT-E6‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪) "Canon‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ (PDF‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ü‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Photos‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WFT-E6‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[w Other Functions‬‬
‫)ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪.[Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ]‪) [Camera‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪/ISO‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ )‪(٦١ A‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ )‪(٦٤ A‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪(٥٩ A‬‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ )‪(٣٣ A‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪(٣٢ A‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ]‪) [Assign Button 1/2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪) [Assign Button 2/2] ،(١/٢‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪(٢/٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٩٩ A) *١٥‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ]‪) [Audio‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪١٥٨‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪(٨١ A) XLR‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪(٨٢ A) (XLR‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪(٨٣ ،٨٢ A‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪(٨٣ A) (MIC‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪(٨٣ A) (MIC‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪(٨٤ A) (MIC‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ )‪(١١٧ A‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪(٨٢ A) XLR‬‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪(٨٣ A) (XLR‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪(٨٧ A‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ]‪) [Media‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪A‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪B‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪A‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪A‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪A‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫‪ ١١‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ]‪) [Video‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪(١٢٩ A) HD/SD SDI‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪(١٣٠ A) HD‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪(١٣٠ A) SD‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪(١٢٩ A) SYNC OUT‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ]‪) [Metadata 1/2‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪(١/٢‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪(١٣٠ A) SD‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ )‪(٩٣ A‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ )‪ (٩٣ A‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )‪(٩٤ A‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ )‪(٩٣ A‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪(٨٥ A‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ]‪) [Metadata 2/2‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪(٢/٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ )‪(١٥٥ A‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ]‪) [Battery/Hour Meter‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٦٠‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪(١٥٥ A‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Reset Hour Meter‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ( )‪(١٥٥ A‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ]‪) [/ Data 1/3‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪(١/٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪(١٠١ A‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎ )‪(١٠٤ A‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )‪(١٠٥ A‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﻟﻸﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )‪(١٠٥ A‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ( )‪(١٠٥ A‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ( )‪(١٠٦ A‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ )ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪(١٠٧ A) (Y‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ )ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪(١٠٧ A) (Y‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ )‪(١٠٥ A‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ]‪) [/ Data 2/3‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪(٢/٣‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ( )‪(١٠٦ A‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ( )‪(١٠٦ A‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ( )‪(١٠٧ A‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﻹﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‬
‫)‪(١٠٦ A‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )‪(١٠٧ A‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ( )‪(١٠٧ A‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )‪(١٠٧ A‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ]‪) [/ Data 3/3‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪(٣/٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪(١٠٨ A‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪(١٠٨ A‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪) A‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪(Y‬‬
‫)‪(١٠٨ A‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪) A‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ( )‪(١٠٨ A‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪) B‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪(١٠٨ A) (Y‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪) B‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ( )‪(١٠٨ A‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪(١٠٩ A‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪(١٠٩ A) ٪١٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺫﺍﺗﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎء ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ )‪.(١٧٣ A‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ؛ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )‪ ١٠٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻭ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻭ‪ ١٠٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪.‬‬‫ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻨﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ]‪) [Battery/Hour Meter‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ( )‪ (١٦٠ A‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ )‪ ٩٩٩‬ﻣﻘﻄﻌًﺎ(‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ )‪ (١٢٢ A‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ )‪ (١٣٢ A‬ﻭﻗﻢ‬‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ (٤٣ A) CF‬ﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻣﻊ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ )‪.(٣٦ A‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ّ .‬‬‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﺘﺰﺓ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ .CMOS‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻠﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ CMOS‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺭﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻛﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ ،CMOS‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻄﻼ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ )‪ (٤٦ A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪) (ÜREC‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ )‪) STBY‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ(( ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ً‬‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ )‪ (١٣٢ A‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫‪.(٤٣ A) CF‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ )‪ (١٣٢ A‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(٤٣ A) CF‬‬‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻄﻼ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ‬‫ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻋﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺧﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻛﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻃﺎﺭﺉ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )‪.(١٧٢ A‬‬‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ .$‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ (١٢٠ A) $‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ً‬‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ )‪ (١٣٢ A‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(٤٣ A) CF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )‪.(١٤٣ A‬‬‫ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) LOCK‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) LOCK‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ(‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ )‪ ٩٩٩‬ﻣﻘﻄﻌًﺎ(‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ )‪(١٢٢ A‬‬‫ﻹﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ ì‬ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ í‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Tally Lamp‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬‫)‪ ٤‬ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .CF‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ )‪ (١٢٢ A‬ﻹﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬‫ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆ ِﺩ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬‫)ﻭﻣﻀﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺒﻂء‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺘﻴﻦ ‪ CF‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫* ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬‫ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪ (١٤٢ A‬ﻹﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF2/CF3‬ﻣﻀﻴ ًﺌﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) RESET‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪) [Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( > ]‪) [All Settings‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ CMOS‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺩﻳﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬‫ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .(٥٨ A) 1/100‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ XLR‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻫﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ XLR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.(٨١ A) MIC+48V‬‬‫ ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ MIC‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ .XLR‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،XLR‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.MIC‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ :XLR‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) AUDIO LEVEL‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ :MIC‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [Audio Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪) [Audio Input‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( > ]‪) [MIC Mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Manual‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [MIC Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ(‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )‪.(٨٣ ،٨٢ A‬‬
‫ ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪.(٨٤ ،٨٣ A‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺸﻮﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺧﺒﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪ (٨٤ ،٨٣ A‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻗﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ )‪.(٤١ A‬‬‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ (٤٣ A) CF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ )‪ ٩٩٩‬ﻣﻘﻄﻌًﺎ(‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ )‪ (١٢٢ A‬ﻹﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ (٤٣ A) SD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) LOCK‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) LOCK‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ(‪.‬‬‫ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪ (١٤٢ A‬ﻹﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬‫ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Photo Numbering‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻂء‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ )‪ (١٣٢ A‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(٤٣ A) CF‬‬‫ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻂء‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(٤٣ A) SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )‪.(١٢٨ A‬‬‫ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WFT-E6‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ "ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ - WFT-E6‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪.(٣٤ A) "Canon‬‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪/A‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ B‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺟﻬﺎ(‬
‫‪Accessing CF A/CF B Do not remove‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ ﻟﻘﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .CF‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬‫‪) Cannot acquire battery information‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪) Intelligent System‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪.‬‬‫‪) Cannot communicate with the battery pack‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪) Continue using this battery pack? .‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ؟(‬
‫ ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪) Intelligent System‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬‫‪) Cannot play back‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆ ِﺩ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ‬‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ CF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ Canon XF Utility‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Cannot record‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .CF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆ ِﺩ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ CF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ Canon XF Utility‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Cannot switch CF card slots‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(CF‬‬
‫ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SLOT SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪) CF A/CF B Buffer overflow‬ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪/A‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪) B). Recording was stopped‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ )‪.(٤١ A‬‬‫‪) CF A/CF B Cannot restore‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪/A‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪(B‬‬
‫ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .CF‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ )‪ (١٣٢ A‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(٤٣ A) CF‬‬‫‪) CF A/CF B error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪/A‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪(B‬‬
‫ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪) CF A/CF B Management data is not supported and will be deleted‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪/A‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ B‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ(‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪ .Canon‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫‪) CF A/CF B Management file error Cannot record‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪/A‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ B‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ً‬‫ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ )‪ (١٣٢ A‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(٤٣ A) CF‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ "‪ "CF A‬ﻭ"‪ "CF B‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) CF A/CF B Media full‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪/A‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ B‬ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ(‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF A‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF B‬ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪) CF A/CF B Media is not supported‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪/A‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ B‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ(‬
‫ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ CF‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥١٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ UDMA‬ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻣﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ )‪.(٤١ A‬‬‫‪) CF A/CF B Number of clips already at maximum‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪/A‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ B‬ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ )‪ ٩٩٩‬ﻣﻘﻄﻌًﺎ(‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ‪ CF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ ً‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ "‪ "CF A‬ﻭ"‪ "CF B‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) CF A/CF B Reached the recording limit for one clip‬ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪/A‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Recording was stopped‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﺃﻭ ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‪.‬‬‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ً ٩٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪١٦٦‬‬
‫‪) CF A/CF B Recording was stopped‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪/A‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.(B‬‬
‫ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .CF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆ ِﺩ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ CF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ Canon XF Utility‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) CF A/CF B Using a card that supports UDMA mode 4 or higher is recommended‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ CF B/CF A‬ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ UDMA4‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ(‬
‫ ﺇﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ UDMA‬ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ .UDMA4‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪ UDMA‬ﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪.UDMA4‬‬‫‪) CF AJCF B / CF BJCF A Switched‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ(‬
‫ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SLOT SELECT‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ( ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪) CF AJCF B / CF BJCF A Will switch in a moment‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ(‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪) Change the battery pack‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪) % / $ Mark Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪($ / %‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ %‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ .$‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪) Check the data on CF A/CF B Initializing the card is also recommended‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪/A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ B‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ(‬
‫ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻷﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫• ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫ ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ )‪ (١٣٢ A‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(٤٣ A) CF‬‬‫‪) Check the SD card‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SD‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SD‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SD‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪) Cover is open‬ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ(‬
‫‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬‫ً‬
‫?‪) Data on CF A/CF B needs recovering Attempt to recover‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪/A‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪B‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺗﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ؟(‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻠﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬‫]‪) [Yes‬ﻧﻌﻢ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Fan error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ(‬
‫ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬‫‪) File name error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪) [Photo Numbering‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ(‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ﻭﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ (١٤٢ A) SD‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )‪.(٤٣ A‬‬
‫‪) Invalid operation‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺤﺔ(‬
‫ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ $‬ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ %‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ %‬ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) START/STOP‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Media full‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ(‬
‫ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF A‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF B‬ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺘﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ )‪ (١٢٢ A‬ﻹﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬‫‪) Media is almost full‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ A‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ B‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪) No clips‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ(‬
‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ )‪ (٤٩ A‬ﻛﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪) No photos‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ(‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪ (١٣٩ A‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪) No Shot Marks‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ(‬
‫ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ]‪) [Shot Mark‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) INDEX‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Number of Shot Marks at maximum‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ )ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ " ﻭ‪ #‬ﻣﻌًﺎ(‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ )‪ (١٢٥ A‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪.Recorded in 24.00P standard Check the data on CF A/CF B Initializing the card is also recommended‬‬
‫)ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ 24.00P‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪/A‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ B‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪ .24.00P‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ )‪ (١٣٢ A‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .(٤٣ A) CF‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،CF‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( > ]‪ [24.00P‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪Recorded in NTSC/PAL standard Check the data on CF A/CF B Initializing the card is also recommended‬‬
‫)ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ NTSC/PAL‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪/A‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ B‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ(‬
‫ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ )‪ (١٣٢ A‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .(٤٣ A) CF‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،CF‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪) [w Other Functions‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( >‬
‫]‪ [NTSC/PAL‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [PAL‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.CF‬‬
‫‪) SD card error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SD‬‬
‫ ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪ MultiMedia Card (MMC‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ )‪.(٤١ A‬‬‫‪) Shot Mark Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ(‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪) System error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆ ِﺩ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬‫‪) This photo cannot be displayed‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪١٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻠﻢ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺻﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻒ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻨﻴﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ؛ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺄﺭﺟﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻄﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺟﺴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻮﺍء ﺫﺍﺕ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ٍ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )‪ ٨٦‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ!‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ )ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )‪ ١٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺨﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮ ﺣﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗُﺴﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )‪ ٨٦‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻉ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ ،(١‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ]‪ .[ð‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ]‪ [ð‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ BP-970G/BP-975‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻴﺠﻌﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) BATT.OPEN‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ّ ١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻻﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪Canon‬‬
‫• ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪) Intelligent System‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫‪١٧٠‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻃﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ :SD‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ SD‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) LOCK‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ( ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) LOCK‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ(‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻐﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺷﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪) [Complete‬ﻛﺎﻣﻞ( ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ .(٤٣ A SD‬ﻭﺍﻣﻸﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﺻﻌﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪/‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪/‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺑ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻤﺸﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻫﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺮﻭﺳﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ٍ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺠﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ ‪) LOCK/RELEASE‬ﻗﻔﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RELEASE‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ّ‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ّ ١‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻤﺴﺤﺔ ﻗﻄﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ ‪) LOCK/RELEASE‬ﻗﻔﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) LOCK‬ﻗﻔﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺿﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ )ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪/‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪١٧٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻵﺧﺮ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﺲ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻭﺩﻋﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﻄﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ،ND‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻛﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻃﺎﺭﺉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﻣﻔﻜﺎ ﺑﺮﻏﻴًﺎ ﺑﺮﺃﺱ ‪ Phillips‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ND‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﻭ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ BP-950G‬ﻭ‪BP-955‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ BP-970G‬ﻭ‪BP-975‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫‪CA-940‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪TA-100‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫‪WFT-E6‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫‪*CA-930‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪*CB-920‬‬
‫ﻗﻮﺱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪SBR-1000‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪TB-1‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ؛ ﺑﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﻤﻼﺋﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ .Canon‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ‪ ،١-٨٠٠-٨٢٨-٤٠٤٠ :‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.Canon U.S.A‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Canon‬‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪BP-955‬‬
‫‪BP-975‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ BP-950G :‬ﻭ‪ BP-955‬ﻭ‪*BP-970G‬‬
‫ﻭ‪*BP-975‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ )ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ BP-975/BP-970G‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ )‪.(١٦٩ A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ CG-940‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻭﻝ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪BP-950G‬‬
‫‪ ٢٤٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪١٧٤‬‬
‫‪BP-955‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪BP-970G‬‬
‫‪ ٣٥٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪BP-975‬‬
‫‪ ٢٩٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ #‬ﺗﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ + LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪SDI‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪NTSC / 24.00P‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪PAL‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪BP-950G‬‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪BP-955‬‬
‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪BP-970G‬‬
‫‪ ٢٥٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٦٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٢٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٦٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٢٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٦٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٢٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٦٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٧٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٦٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٧٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٦٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٧٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪BP-975‬‬
‫‪ ٢٧٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٧٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٤٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٧٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٧٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٤٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٧٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٥٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٥٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٥٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ #‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ(‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪NTSC / 24.00P‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪PAL‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫‪BP-950G‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪BP-955‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪BP-970G‬‬
‫‪ ٢٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٩٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪BP-975‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ $‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ + LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪SDI‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪NTSC / 24.00P‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪PAL‬‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪BP-955‬‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪BP-970G‬‬
‫‪ ٢٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٦٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٢٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٦٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٢٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٦٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٦٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٧٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٦٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٧٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٦٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٧٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪BP-975‬‬
‫‪ ٢٧٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٧٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٤٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٧٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٥٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٥٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٥٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪BP-950G‬‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪BP-950G‬‬
‫‪BP-955‬‬
‫‪BP-970G‬‬
‫‪BP-975‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫‪ ٢٠٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫‪ ٢٠٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٨٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫‪ ٢١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٩٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫‪ ١٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ $‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ(‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪NTSC / 24.00P‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪PAL‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫‪ ٢١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٩٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫‪ ١٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫‪ ٢١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٩٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ*(‬
‫‪ ١٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١٧٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ‪CB-920‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻭﻻﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﺎﺋﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪TA-100‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ‪ TA-100‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬ﻓﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻮﺱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪SBR-1000‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ SBR-1000‬ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪C300 / C300 PL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ GOP :‬ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪MPEG-2‬؛‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ PCM :‬ﺧﻄﻲ‪ ١٦ ،‬ﺑﺖ‪ ٤٨ ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ٢ ،‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪MXF :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪) DCF :‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Exif‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ،٢٫٣‬ﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ )‪ (CBR‬ﻭ‪ 4:2:2‬ﻭ‪(422P@HL‬‬
‫‪ 59.94i :1920×1080‬ﻭ‪ 50.00i‬ﻭ‪ 29.97P‬ﻭ‪ 25.00P‬ﻭ‪ 24.00P‬ﻭ‪23.98P‬‬
‫‪ 59.94P :1280×720‬ﻭ‪ 50.00P‬ﻭ‪ 29.97P‬ﻭ‪ 25.00P‬ﻭ‪ 24.00P‬ﻭ‪23.98P‬‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ )‪ (VBR‬ﻭ‪ 4:2:0‬ﻭ‪(MP@HL‬‬
‫‪ 59.94i :1920×1080‬ﻭ‪ 50.00i‬ﻭ‪ 29.97P‬ﻭ‪ 25.00P‬ﻭ‪23.98P‬‬
‫‪ 59.94P :1280×720‬ﻭ‪ 50.00P‬ﻭ‪ 29.97P‬ﻭ‪ 25.00P‬ﻭ‪23.98P‬‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ )‪ (CBR‬ﻭ‪ 4:2:0‬ﻭ‪(MP@H14‬‬
‫‪ 59.94i :1440×1080‬ﻭ‪ 50.00i‬ﻭ‪ 29.97P‬ﻭ‪ 25.00P‬ﻭ‪23.98P‬‬
‫• ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪ CompactFlash (CF‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪) I‬ﻓﺘﺤﺘﺎﻥ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ‪) SDHC‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪*(SD‬‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ**‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ٤٠ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ٣٥ ،‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ٥٥ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ٢٥ ،‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ٨٠ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ CF‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٦٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ١٦٠ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ٣٥ ،‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ٢٢٥ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ٢٥ ،‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ٣١٠ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫** ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ CMOS‬ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ٨٢٩٠٠٠٠‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ )‪ ٣٨٤٠ × ٢١٦٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ١٫٣ :‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ٠٫٥٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ١٥٥٥٠٠٠‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ‪٪١٠٠‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ #‬ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻦ ‪) Canon‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪(EF-S‬‬
‫‪ $‬ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ PL‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ١٫٥٣ :‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‬
‫• ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ :ND‬ﻣﺪﻣﺞ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٦‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﻥ‪ A ،‬ﻭ‪ ،(B‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٥٠٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ(؛ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫)ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ٥٤٠٠ ،‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺘﻮﻫﺞ ‪ ٣٢٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫• ‪#‬ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ‪ :‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١/٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ISO 320 :‬ﻭ‪ ISO 400‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ISO 12800‬ﻭ‪ISO 20000‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ISO 320 :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ISO 20000‬‬
‫• ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪:‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦-‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٣‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٠٫٥‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١/٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﻲء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫• ‪#‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻦ ‪***Canon‬‬
‫***ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ )‪ ٠) ISO 640‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‪ ٢٠٠٠ ،‬ﻟﻜﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪(٪٨٩٫٩‬‬
‫! ‪ 1920×1080) F9‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 1920×1080) F10 " (59.94i‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪(50.00i‬‬
‫‪١٧٨‬‬
‫• ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )‪ ،ISO 850‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ‪) Canon Log‬ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ‪((Canon‬‬
‫‪ ٥٤‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ‪ ! ،1920×1080 ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ " / 29.97P‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪(25.00P‬‬
‫• ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )‪ ٢٤‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ‪(f/1.2‬‬
‫! ‪ ٠٫٣٠‬ﻟﻜﺲ )‪ ،29.97P‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ‪(١/٣٠‬‬
‫" ‪ ٠٫٢٥‬ﻟﻜﺲ )‪ ،25.00P‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ‪(١/٢٥‬‬
‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ٣٥ ،‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ١٩٢٠×١٠٨٠ :‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪ ١٢٨٠×٧٢٠ ،‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ١٤٤٠×١٠٨٠ :‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩٢٠×١٠٨٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪ ١٢٨٠×٧٢٠ ،‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ(‬
‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HD/SD SDI‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ ،BNC‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ٠٫٨ ،‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٥‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫‪SMPTE 292M‬‬
‫‪:HD-SDI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ 1080i‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(720P‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪(VITC/LTC‬‬
‫‪SMPTE 259M‬‬
‫‪:SD-SDI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ 480i‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(576i‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪(VITC/LTC‬‬
‫• ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫• ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪SYNC OUT‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ ،BNC‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ١ ،‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ‪ /‬ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٥‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﺼﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )‪ ،(HD-Y‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫• ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪MIC‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪ ٧٢- ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪ ١٨-‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ( ‪ ٦٠٠ /‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ٢٠ :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫• ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ × )ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ(‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٣.٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪ G- ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٢-‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫• ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪GENLOCK‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ ،BNC‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ١ :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٥‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫• ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪TIME CODE‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ ،BNC‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ٠٫٥ :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٨‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ‪ /‬ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ‪ ١٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪ ١ :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٥‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫• ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪REMOTE‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٢٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫• ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫• ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪WFT‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ WFT-E6‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪/‬ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫• ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ(‬
‫‪ ٧٫٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ ٨٫٤ ،‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺩﺧﻞ ‪(DC IN‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪/LCD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪(SDI‬‬
‫‪ ١١٫٧‬ﻭﺍﺕ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪ (24.00P ،NTSC‬ﻭ‪ ١١٫٤‬ﻭﺍﺕ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪(PAL‬‬
‫‪ #‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٫٧‬ﻭﺍﺕ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪ (24.00P ،NTSC‬ﻭ‪ ١٠٫٤‬ﻭﺍﺕ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪(PAL‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١١٫٧‬ﻭﺍﺕ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪ (24.00P ،NTSC‬ﻭ‪ ١١٫٤‬ﻭﺍﺕ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪(PAL‬‬
‫‪ $‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٫٦‬ﻭﺍﺕ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪ (24.00P ،NTSC‬ﻭ‪ ١٠٫٢‬ﻭﺍﺕ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪(PAL‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ٢٠٫٩ :‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(*‬
‫ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١٧١ × ١٧٩ × ١٣٣ #‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‪ ٦٫٧ × ٧٫٠ × ٥٫٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( ‪ ١٧٧ × ١٧٩ × ١٣٣ $‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‪ ٧٫٠ × ٧٫٠ × ٥٫٢‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻭﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١٧١ × ١٧٩ × ١٧٤ #‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‪ ٦٫٧ × ٧٫٠ × ٦٫٩‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( ‪ ١٧٧ × ١٧٩ × ١٧٤ $‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‪ ٧٫٠ × ٧٫٠ × ٦٫٩‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١٨٧ × ٢٤٩ × ١٨٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‪ ٧٫٤ × ٩٫٨ × ٧٫٣‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠١ × ٢٨٤ × ١٨٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‪ ١١٫٩ × ١١٫٢ × ٧٫٣‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫* ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ **‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺭﻃﻼ(‬
‫‪ ١٦٣٠ $‬ﺟﻢ )‪٣٫٦‬‬
‫ﺭﻃﻼ(‬
‫‪ ١٤٣٠ #‬ﺟﻢ )‪٣٫٢‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻭﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ BP-955‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ‪:CF‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺭﻃﻼ(‬
‫‪ ٢٧٢٠ $‬ﺟﻢ )‪٦٫٠‬‬
‫ﺭﻃﻼ(‬
‫‪ ٢٥٢٠ #‬ﺟﻢ )‪٥٫٦‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻭﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ BP-955‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ‪:CF‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺭﻃﻼ(‬
‫‪ ٢٩٠٠ $‬ﺟﻢ )‪٦٫٤‬‬
‫ﺭﻃﻼ(‬
‫‪ ٢٧٠٠ #‬ﺟﻢ )‪٦٫٠‬‬
‫** ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٢٧٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎ؛ ﻭﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪XLR‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ :LCD‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٢٧٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ :LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ١٠٫١‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ٤٫٠‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ١٢٣٠٠٠٠‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ‪٪١٠٠‬‬
‫• ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ CH1‬ﻭ‪) CH2‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪(٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪) XLR‬ﺳﻦ‪ :١‬ﻋﺎﺯﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻦ ‪ :٢‬ﺳﺎﺧﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻦ ‪ :٣‬ﺑﺎﺭﺩ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ٦٠- :‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪ ١٨-‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ( ‪ ٦٠٠ /‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) LINE‬ﺍﻟﺨﻂ(‪ ٤ :‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪ ١٨-‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ( ‪ ١٠ /‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ٢٠ :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺭﻃﻼ(‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٦٢٠‬ﺟﻢ )‪١٫٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻧﻤﻄﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌًﺎ )ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(؛ ﻭﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٣٠‬ﺟﻢ )‪ ٨٫١‬ﺃﻭﻧﺲ(‬
‫‪١٧٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻧﻤﻄﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٠٫٦٤‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ١/٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( ﻟﻠﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪١٨٠‬ﺟﻢ )‪ ٦٫٣‬ﺃﻭﻧﺲ(‬
‫‪١٨٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪CA-940‬‬
‫• ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ٦٠/٥٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫• ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ /‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‬
‫‪ ٨٫٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ٤٫٨ ،‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ‪ ٨٣ /‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ )‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ( – ‪ ١٠٧‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ )‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ(‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٣٩ × ٥١ × ١٠٣‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‪ ٥٫٥ × ٢٫٠ × ٤٫١‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪ ٣٩٥ :‬ﺟﻢ )‪ ١٣٫٩‬ﺃﻭﻧﺲ(‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CG-940‬‬
‫• ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ٦٠/٥٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫• ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ /‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‬
‫‪ ٨٫٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ٢٫٠/١٫٥ ،‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ‪ ٤٠ /‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪/‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ )‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ( – ‪ ٥٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪/‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ )‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ(‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ ١١٠ × ٥١ × ٨٥ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‪ ٤٫٣ × ٢٫٠ × ٣٫٣‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺟﻢ )‪ ٨٫٥‬ﺃﻭﻧﺲ(‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪BP-955‬‬
‫• ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‬
‫‪ ٧٫٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫• ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ‪ ٥٢٠٠ :‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪ ٣٧ :‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٤٩٠٠ /‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ ٧٠٫٥ × ٤٣٫٥ × ٣٨٫٢ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ )‪ ٢٫٨ × ١٫٧ × ١٫٥‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪ ٢٢٠ :‬ﺟﻢ )‪ ٧٫٨‬ﺃﻭﻧﺲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻨﺎﻳﺮ ‪ .٢٠١٢‬ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٨١‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺮ )ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪١١٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪١٤١ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ* ‪٣٣ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ‪١٧١ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪٧٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪١٢٧ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٥٥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪١٥٢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٤٣ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪٦٦ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪٤٦ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪١٢٨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪٥٥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.00P‬‬
‫‪) ABB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ( ‪٤٦ . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪) CINEMA‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ( )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ‪٥٤ . .‬‬
‫‪) LUT‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ( ‪١٠٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪٥٥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NTSC‬‬
‫‪٥٥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL‬‬
‫‪٤٧ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wi-Fi Remote‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪١٣١ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪٩٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ ‪١٦٢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٨٧ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪٨٧ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ )ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ‪٧٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ )ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ‪٧٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪٣٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXT 1/2‬‬
‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪٨٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XLR‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪١٥٢ . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٠٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٤٧ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١١١ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪٣٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ‪٦١ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ‪١٠٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canon Log‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٣٢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *EF‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٣٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . **PL‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪٣٧ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ‪٣٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٢٣ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪٨٣ ،٨٢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪١٣٢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ‪١٧٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪CF‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪٤١ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٤٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪٤٥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ‪٤٢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪١١٤ ،٤٣ . . . . . . . . CF‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٤٢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SD‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪٨٥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٧٣ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪٤٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪١٣٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ( ‪٥٥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ‪٧٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٦١ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISO‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪٥٨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪١٥٦ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫*‪ #‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪١٨٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪١٢٥ . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪١١٣ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪١٢٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪١٢٣ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٣٧ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCD‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪٨٨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ‪٨٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ‪٢٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺡ* ‪٦٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪٥١ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪٢٨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪٥٣ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٨٣ ،٨٢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻔﺾ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪٨٤ ،٨٣ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪٨٥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪٦٣ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ND‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪٧٧ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٠٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٣٧ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٨٣ ،٨٢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ‪٣٨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪١٥٢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ‪٢٣ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٩٢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٩٥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪٥٥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ‪٥٥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪٢٦ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ‪٢٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪/$‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪١٢٠ ،٩١ . . . . . . . . %‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪/‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪١٢٤ ،٩٠ . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪١٢١ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ‪١٢٢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ‪١١٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪١١٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪١٧٣ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ ‪٧١ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ‪٣٥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ‪٨٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪١٧٧ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ‪١١٦ . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪٨٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ‪١٣١ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٤٤ . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ‪١٤٢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪١٤٣ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٤١ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٠١ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻧﺘﻮﻡ )ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ( ‪٨١ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪٢٥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC IN‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪٧٧ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENLOCK‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪١٢٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HD/SD SDI‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪١٢٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDMI OUT‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪٨٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIC‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪١٢٩ ،٧٩ . . . . . . . . . . . SYNC OUT‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪٧٩ ،٧٨ . . . . . . . . . . . . TIME CODE‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪٤٧ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WFT‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪٨٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪١٥٥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١١٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( )‪١٢٠ ،٩١ . . . . . . . . . . . . . ($‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )‪١٢٠ ،٩١ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (%‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٧١ . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪١٢٤ ،٩٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ* ‪٦٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪١٦٥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ‪٣٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪١٣٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪٧٢ . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪٥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXF‬‬
‫*‪ #‬ﻓﻘﻂ **‪ $‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪١٨٣‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ‪٣٨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٣٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪٣٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪٧٦ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪٥٧ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ‪٩٦ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ‪٩٥ . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ‪٩٣ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ‪٧٣ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪٩٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١١٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪٦٩ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ CANON‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١٨٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "‪ ("Canon USA‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪) Canon U.S.A., Inc.‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ"(* ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪) Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺴﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻓﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺪ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺒﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﺰﺍء ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ "ﻋﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ" ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪ :‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ "ﻋﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ"‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺠﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﺼﺎﻧﻌﻨﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ "ﻋﺎﻣًﺎ ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺪﺍ"‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺭﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﺠﺎ ًﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻭﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺭﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ ﻭﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺒﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪" ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ" ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﻨﺢ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Canon USA‬ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Canon USA‬ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon USA‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪) www.usa.canon.com/support‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻤﺜﻠﻲ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon U.S.A.‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ( ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ؛‬
‫ﺏ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﻴﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻄﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء؛‬
‫ﺟـ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Canon USA‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ؛‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺴﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﺩﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺍﺭﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻷﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﺭﻩ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ "ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ" ﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .Canon USA‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺬ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺘﺰﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﻣﻨﺤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ )ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻔﺮﺽ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﻨﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ(‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CANON USA‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻔﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺭﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CANON USA‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺿﺪ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CANON USA‬ﺳﻌﺮ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CANON USA‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﻻﺩﻋﺎء‪ .‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺼﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺗﻠﺤﻖ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺑﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺗﻚ ﻭﺑﺎﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺑﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺗﻬﻢ ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪) .CANON USA‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺭﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ(‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻬﺎ ﻟﻪ ﻛﻬﺪﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻗﺎ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻻﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪.CANON U.S.A., INC.‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻗﺎ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫*ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺗﺴﻌﻮﻥ )‪ (٩٠‬ﻳﻮﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛـﻨـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪CANON‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ "‪ ("Canon Canada‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪) Canon Canada Inc.‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ"( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻓﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪) Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺪ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺒﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﺰﺍء ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،Canon Canada‬ﺑﺄﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪ :‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺠﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‪:‬‬
‫)ﺃ( ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻳﻠﺤﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺟﻤًﺎ ﻋﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﺣﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺛﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ؛‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ؛‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ "ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ "‪"Canon‬؛‬
‫‪ (٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (٥‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(؛‬
‫)ﺏ( ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon Canda‬ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪) www.canon.ca/english/cs‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪) www.canon.ca/francais/cs‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻤﺜﻠﻲ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .Canon Canada‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Canon‬‬
‫‪ Canada‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺭﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﺮﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺛﻤﻦ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon Canada‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﻮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻧﻴﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Canon Canada‬ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻬﺎ ﻟﻪ ﻛﻬﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻨﺺ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٥‬‬
Canon Inc.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
ASIA and HONG KONG, S.A.R.
Canon Hongkong Company Ltd
19/F, The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive,
Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
+852 3191 2333,
+852 2428 3963
NEW ZEALAND www.canon.co.nz
Canon New Zealand Ltd
0800-222-666 (within New Zealand only)
(64) 09-489-0300
SINGAPORE
Canon Singapore Pte. Ltd
1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower,
Singapore 098632
(65) 6799 8888,
(65) 6799 8882
AUSTRALIA www.canon.com.au
Canon Australia Pty Ltd
13-13-83 (within Australia only)
(61) 02-9805-2555
CANADA
CANON CANADA INC.
http://www.canon.ca/pro
❖ Professional Product Support / Soutien des
produits professionnels
(800) 667-2666
UNITED KINGDOM
Canon UK Ltd
CCI Service Centre, Unit 130, Centennial Park,
Borehamwood, Hertfordshire, WD6 3SE
0844-369-0100
USA
CANON U.S.A., INC.
http://pro.usa.canon.com
http://pro.usa.canon.com/support
(855) CINE-EOS (855-246-3367)
(USA only)
CENTRO Y SURAMÉRICA
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
703 Waterford Way, Suite 400,
Miami, FL 33126 USA
EUROPE www.canon-europa.com
Canon Europa N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61,
1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
MÉXICO
CANON MEXICANA, S DE RL DE CV
Blvd. Manuel Ávila Camacho No. 138, Piso 17
Col. Lomas de Chapultepec, C.P. 11000
México D.F., México
CANON U.S.A., INC. NEW JERSEY OFFICE
100 Jamesburg Road, Jamesburg, NJ 08831 USA
Visit your local Canon Web site to download the latest version of this Instruction Manual.
0157W376
© CANON INC. 2012
PUB. DIE-0406-000
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising